WO2025017521A1

WO2025017521A1 - Sampling port, display unit, connection component, and breathing assistance apparatus having same

Info

Publication number: WO2025017521A1
Application number: PCT/IB2024/057002
Authority: WO
Inventors: Jonathan Russell BARRETT
Original assignee: Fisher and Paykel Healthcare Ltd
Current assignee: Fisher and Paykel Healthcare Ltd
Priority date: 2023-07-20
Filing date: 2024-07-19
Publication date: 2025-01-23
Anticipated expiration: 2026-01-20

Abstract

A breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit (50); a portable display unit (3000, 3500, 4000) configured to removably connect to the base unit (50); and at least one sampling port (4600, 4700, 4701) coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit (50), the at least one sampling port (4600, 4700, 4701) being configured to connect with a sampling line (4602) associated with a patient, wherein the at least one sampling port (4600, 4700, 4701) is configured to, when the portable display unit (3000, 3500, 4000) is connected to the base unit (50), be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit (3000, 3500, 4000).

Description

SAMPLING PORT, DISPLAY UNIT, CONNECTION COMPONENT, AND BREATHING ASSISTANCE APPARATUS HAVING SAME

TECHNICAL FIELD

[0001] The present disclosure relates to a breathing assistance apparatus. The present disclosure also relates to a portable sampling device. The present disclosure further relates to a display unit. The present disclosure further relates to a portable display unit. The present disclosure further relates to a connection structure. The present disclosure further relates to a connection component. The present disclosure further relates to a support structure. The present disclosure further relates to a retaining structure.

BACKGROUND ART

[0002] Breathing assistance apparatuses are used in various environments such as hospital, medical facility, residential care, retirement facilities, hospices, or home environments to deliver a flow of gas to users or patients. The breathing assistance apparatuses come in various forms, such as a standalone humidifier apparatus, a continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP) apparatus, a high flow apparatus, or a ventilator.

[0003] The breathing assistance apparatuses typically have one or more accessories such as a breathing conduit and a patient interface such as a cannula or mask for delivering gases to a patient. The conduit enables gases to be delivered from the housing of the breathing assistance apparatus to the patient. For example, the apparatus may be placed on a floor or other support surface, and the patient may be in a bed. The breathing assistance apparatus may have a recess for receipt of a humidification chamber. The humidification chamber will receive liquid from, for example, a flexible liquid bag that delivers liquid to a humidifier humidification chamber via one or more tubes. Alternatively, the humidification chamber can be removed and refilled with liquid as required. The recess will contain a heater plate to heat the humidification chamber, to humidify gases passing through the humidification chamber. The humidified gases are then delivered to the patient.

[0004] The breathing assistance apparatus may have a display, to display information relating to the use of the apparatus and/or to enable a user to control functioning of the apparatus. SUMMARY

[0005] In a first aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is disclosed, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit configured to provide a flow of gases; a humidifier for humidifying the flow of gases; and at least one sampling port coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, the at least one sampling port being configured to connect with a sampling line associated with a patient, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to, when a portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

[0006] In some configurations, the humidifier comprises a humidification chamber configured to receive a liquid.

[0007] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is disclosed, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; a portable display unit configured to removably connect to the base unit; and at least one sampling port coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, the at least one sampling port being configured to connect with a sampling line associated with a patient, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to, when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

[0008] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is disclosed, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and at least one sampling port coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, the at least one sampling port being configured to connect with a sampling line associated with a patient, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to, when a portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit, and wherein the breathing assistance apparatus is capable of providing at least one of a high flow therapy or a pressure-based therapy to the patient.

[0009] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port is coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit at a part of the base unit allowing the at least one sampling port to be accessible and to minimise interference with the portable display unit when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit. [0010] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port is coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit in an orientation allowing the at least one sampling port to be accessible and to minimise interference with the portable display unit when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit.

[0011] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port is pivotably coupled to or configured to pivotably couple to the base unit.

[0012] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port is rotatably coupled to or configured to rotatably couple to the base unit.

[0013] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port is configured to engage with a complementary port provided with the sampling line.

[0014] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port is configured to removably couple to the base unit, and the base unit comprises a connector port configured to engage with the at least one sampling port.

[0015] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a lid configured to cover the connector port.

[0016] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a cover configured to cover an end region of the at least one sampling port that is configured to connect with the sampling line.

[0017] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port is foldable.

[0018] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port comprises an optically transparent material.

[0019] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus is configured for the at least one sampling port to be illuminated by the base unit in response to determination of an operating mode of the breathing assistance apparatus requiring connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line.

[0020] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus is further configured to turn off illumination of the at least one sampling port in response to determination of connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line.

[0021] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus is further configured to turn off illumination of the at least one sampling port after a defined period of time. [0022] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus is configured for the at least one sampling port to be illuminated by the base unit in response to determination of a connection error with the sampling line.

[0023] In some configurations, a recess is defined in the base unit to receive the at least one sampling port.

[0024] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a covering configured to cover the recess, and the covering is configured to allow the at least one sampling port to extend through the covering.

[0025] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises an electrical circuit within the recess or removably receivable within the recess, the electrical circuit being configured to operatively communicate with the at least one sampling port.

[0026] In some configurations, the electrical circuit is further configured to operatively communicate with a controller of the base unit.

[0027] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises an intermediate connection component arranged within the recess or removably receivable within the recess to operatively communicate with the at least one sampling port and the electrical circuit.

[0028] In some configurations, the electrical circuit comprises a sensor arrangement.

[0029] In some configurations, the sensor arrangement comprises at least one pressure sensor.

[0030] In some configurations, the sampling line comprises a gases sampling line, and the at least one sampling port is configured to connect with the gases sampling line to convey a gases flow from the gases sampling line to the base unit.

[0031] In some configurations, a quantity of the at least one sampling port arranged to connect with corresponding sampling lines for a therapy session for the patient is selectively configurable based on a breathing therapy mode to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus corresponding to the therapy session.

[0032] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a plurality of sampling ports coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, wherein the plurality of sampling ports are configured to, when a portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

[0033] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is disclosed, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and a plurality of sampling ports coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, each sampling port of the plurality of sampling ports being configured to connect with a respective sampling line associated with a patient, wherein a quantity of the plurality of sampling ports arranged to connect with corresponding sampling lines for a therapy session for the patient is selectively configurable based on a breathing therapy mode to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus corresponding to the therapy session.

[0034] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises at least one cover, wherein a respective cover of the at least one cover is configured to cover an end region of a respective sampling port of the plurality of sampling ports that is to be unused for the therapy session.

[0035] In some configurations, the plurality of sampling ports are configured to removably couple to the base unit, and the base unit comprises a plurality of connector ports configured to correspondingly engage with the plurality of sampling ports.

[0036] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises at least one lid, wherein a respective lid of the at least one lid is configured to cover a respective connector port of the plurality of connector ports that is to be unused for the therapy session.

[0037] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a portable display unit configured to removably connect to the base unit.

[0038] In some configurations, the plurality of sampling ports are configured to, when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

[0039] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a humidifier. [0040] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus is capable of providing at least one of a high flow therapy or a pressure-based therapy to the patient.

[0041] In some configurations, a recess is defined in the base unit to receive the plurality of sampling ports.

[0042] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a covering configured to cover the recess, and the covering is configured to allow the plurality of sampling ports to extend through the covering.

[0043] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises an electrical circuit within the recess or removably receivable within the recess, the electrical circuit being configured to operatively communicate with the at least one sampling ports.

[0044] In some configurations, the electrical circuit comprises a sensor arrangement.

[0045] In some configurations, the sensor arrangement comprises at least one pressure sensor.

[0046] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a portable sampling device is disclosed, the portable sampling device comprising: at least one sampling port configured to connect with a sampling line associated with a patient; and an electrical circuit configured to operatively communicate with the at least one sampling port, wherein the portable sampling device is configured to electrically couple to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[0047] In some configurations, the electrical circuit comprises a sensor arrangement.

[0048] In some configurations, the sensor arrangement comprises at least one pressure sensor.

[0049] In some configurations, the portable sampling device further comprises a cover configured to cover an end region of the at least one sampling port that is configured to connect with the sampling line.

[0050] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port comprises an optically transparent material. [0051] In some configurations, the electrical circuit comprises a light source, and the light source is configured to illuminate the at least one sampling port in response to determination of an operating mode of the breathing assistance apparatus requiring connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line.

[0052] In some configurations, the portable sampling device is configured to turn off the light source in response to determination of connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line.

[0053] In some configurations, the portable sampling device is configured to turn off the light source after a defined period of time.

[0054] In some configurations, the light source in configured to illuminate the at least one sampling port in response to determination of a connection error with the sampling line.

[0055] In some configurations, a quantity of the at least one sampling port arranged to connect with corresponding sampling lines for a therapy session for the patient is selectively configurable based on a breathing therapy mode to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus corresponding to the therapy session.

[0056] In some configurations, the sampling line comprises a gases sampling line, and the at least one sampling port is configured to connect with the gases sampling line to convey a gases flow from the gases sampling line to the portable sampling device.

[0057] In some configurations, the portable sampling device further comprises a USB connector configured to engage with a complementary USB connector at the base unit.

[0058] In some configurations, the portable sampling device is configured to be couplable to the base unit.

[0059] In some configurations, the portable sampling device further comprises a device housing supporting the at least one sampling port and the electrical circuit; and a mounting feature couplable to the base unit, the mounting feature configured to mount the device housing to the base unit.

[0060] In some configurations, the portable sampling device is configured to be couplable to a breathing circuit associated with the patient. [0061] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port comprises an adapter configured to removably couple to the breathing circuit.

[0062] In some configurations, the portable sampling device further comprises a plurality of sampling ports configured to connect with corresponding sampling lines.

[0063] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is disclosed, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and the portable sampling device as described herein.

[0064] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a portable display unit is provided, the portable display unit comprising: a screen; a display unit housing supporting the screen; and a dial arranged on a side of the display unit housing having the screen, wherein the portable display unit is configured to restrict movement of the dial in a lateral direction towards the display unit housing.

[0065] In some configurations, the display unit housing comprises an annular wall, and the dial is fitted over the annular wall.

[0066] In some configurations, the dial is fitted snugly with the annular wall.

[0067] In some configurations, the portable display unit further comprises a shank configured to support the dial, wherein the shank is fitted snugly with the annular wall.

[0068] In some configurations, a section of the annular wall extends from the dial to an internal surface of the display unit housing on a rear side of the display unit housing opposite to the side of the display unit housing having the screen.

[0069] In some configurations, the section of the annular wall comprises a ribbed structure.

[0070] In some configurations, the display unit housing comprises a support wall extending from the dial to an internal surface of the display unit housing on a rear side of the display unit housing opposite to the side of the display unit housing having the screen.

[0071] In some configurations, the support wall comprises a ribbed structure. [0072] In some configurations, the portable display unit further comprises a cover configured to fit the dial, the cover comprising an impact absorbent material.

[0073] In some configurations, the dial comprises a rotatable component to provide a first user input; and a push button to provide a second user input.

[0074] In some configurations, the rotatable component surrounds a periphery of the push button, and wherein a pushing surface of the push button is recessed within the rotatable component.

[0075] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a portable display unit is provided, the portable display unit comprising: a screen; a display unit housing supporting the screen; a dial arranged on a side of the display unit housing having the screen; and a cover configured to fit the dial, the cover comprising an impact absorbent material.

[0076] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and the portable display unit as described herein, the portable display unit being configured to removably connect to the base unit.

[0077] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a display unit is provided, the display unit comprising: a screen; a display unit housing supporting the screen; and a button for disabling an alarm, wherein the display unit is configured to illuminate the button in response to an activation of the alarm.

[0078] In some configurations, the display unit is configured to illuminate the button continuously in response to the activation of the alarm.

[0079] In some configurations, the display unit is configured to illuminate the button intermittently in response to the activation of the alarm.

[0080] In some configurations, in response to the button being operated to disable the alarm, the display unit is configured to switch off illumination of the button. [0081] In some configurations, the alarm comprises an audio alarm, and the audio alarm is muted in response to the button being operated to disable the audio alarm.

[0082] In some configurations, the alarm comprises an audio alarm, and the audio alarm is snoozed in response to the button being operated to disable the audio alarm.

[0083] In some configurations, the display unit further comprises an optical element on the display unit housing, wherein the display unit is configured to illuminate the optical element in response to the activation of the alarm.

[0084] In some configurations, the display unit is configured to illuminate the button in accordance with illumination of the optical element.

[0085] In some configurations, the button comprises a physical button on the display unit housing.

[0086] In some configurations, the screen is configured to display a graphical user interface, and the button comprises a graphical button in the graphical user interface.

[0087] In some configurations, the display unit is a portable display unit configured to removably connect to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[0088] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and the display unit as described herein.

[0089] In some configurations, the base unit comprises an optical component, wherein the base unit is configured to illuminate the optical component in response to the activation of the alarm.

[0090] In some configurations, the base unit is configured to illuminate the optical component in accordance with illumination of the button.

[0091] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a connection structure is provided, the connection structure comprising: a connection component configured to engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit; and a mounting component configured to mount the connection component to a support component.

[0092] In some configurations, the mounting component comprises a clamp.

[0093] In some configurations, the clamp comprises a C clamp or a G clamp.

[0094] In some configurations, the connection component is tiltable relative to the mounting component.

[0095] In some configurations, a tilt angle of the connection component relative to the mounting component is adjustable by a user.

[0096] In some configurations, the connection structure is configured to, when the connection component is mounted to the support component and is further engaged with the complementary connection component, maintain the portable display unit at an angle relative to the support component.

[0097] In some configurations, the connection component and the mounting component are pivotably mounted to one another.

[0098] In some configurations, the connection component is tilted at a fixed angle relative to the mounting component.

[0099] In some configurations, the connection component comprises a backing structure; a surrounding wall extending from the backing structure, the surrounding wall defining two flanges directed inwardly towards one another, the two flanges being spaced apart from one another and arranged opposite to one another, the two flanges further being spaced apart from the backing structure to define a gap therebetween, wherein the backing structure and the surrounding wall define an opening at one side of the connection component.

[00100] In some configurations, for each flange of the two flanges, the flange comprises a tapered end portion adjacent to the opening.

[00101] In some configurations, the tapered end portion is curved.

[00102] In some configurations, the two flanges are at least substantially parallel or at least substantially coplanar to one another.

[00103] In some configurations, the connection component is a component of a sliding connector. [00104] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a portable display unit is provided, the portable display unit comprising: a screen; a display unit housing supporting the screen; and a complementary connection component coupled to the display unit housing, the complementary connection component being configured to engage with the connection component of the connection structure as described herein.

[00105] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a support structure is provided, the support structure comprising: a support component; and a connection structure as described herein, the connection structure being attachable to the support component.

[00106] In some configurations, the connection component of the connection structure is configured to engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit.

[00107] In some configurations, the support structure is configured to support medical equipment.

[00108] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a connection component is provided, the connection component comprising: a backing structure; a surrounding wall extending from the backing structure, the surrounding wall defining two flanges directed inwardly towards one another, the two flanges being spaced apart from one another and arranged opposite to one another, the two flanges further being spaced apart from the backing structure to define a gap therebetween, wherein the backing structure and the surrounding wall define an opening at one side of the connection component, and wherein, for each flange of the two flanges, the flange comprises a tapered end portion adjacent to the opening.

[00109] In some configurations, the tapered end portion is curved.

[00110] In some configurations, the two flanges are at least substantially parallel or at least substantially coplanar to one another.

[00111] In some configurations, the connection component is configured to be attachable to at least one of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus or a support component, and further configured to engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit to support the portable display unit.

[00112] In some configurations, the connection component is a component of a sliding connector.

[00113] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a portable display unit is provided, the portable display unit comprising: a screen; a display unit housing supporting the screen; and a complementary connection component coupled to the display unit housing, the complementary connection component being configured to engage with the connection component as described herein.

[00114] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and a first connection component attached or removably attachable to the base unit, the first connection component comprising the connection component as described herein.

[00115] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a portable display unit, the portable display unit comprising a second connection component that is engageable with the first connection component.

[00116] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a support structure is provided, the support structure comprising: a support component; and a first connection component attachable to the support component, the first connection component comprising the connection component as described herein.

[00117] In some configurations, the first connection component is configured to engage with a second connection component of a portable display unit.

[00118] In some configurations, the support structure is configured to support medical equipment.

[00119] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a portable display unit is provided, the portable display unit comprising: a screen; a display unit housing supporting the screen; and a connection component coupled to the display unit housing, the connection component comprising: a body portion; and two flanges extending from a region of the body portion on opposite sides of the body portion, wherein the connection component is configured for the body portion to be received by a complementary connection component via a sliding motion and for the two flanges to confine the sliding motion up to the region.

[00120] In some configurations, the body portion extends in a first direction, and the two flanges extend in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction.

[00121] In some configurations, a recess is defined in the display unit housing, and the connection component is disposed in the recess.

[00122] In some configurations, the portable display unit further comprises a retention feature configured to engage with a complementary retention feature.

[00123] In some configurations, the retention feature is disposed on the connection component.

[00124] In some configurations, the retention feature comprises a protrusion.

[00125] In some configurations, the portable display unit further comprises a release feature operable to release the retention feature from engagement with the complementary retention feature.

[00126] In some configurations, the release feature comprises a lever.

[00127] In some configurations, the body portion extends from a first side of the display unit housing towards a second side of the display unit housing, the connection component is configured to be received by the complementary connection component from the second side, and the release feature is disposed proximal to the first side.

[00128] In some configurations, the connection component is arranged on a rear side of the portable display unit that is opposite to a front side of the portable display unit having the screen.

[00129] In some configurations, the connection component is configured to removably connect the portable display unit to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus and to a support component. [00130] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and the portable display unit as described herein, the portable display unit being configured to removably connect to the base unit.

[00131] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a retaining structure is provided, the retaining structure comprising: a base component; a first arm extending from the base component in a first direction; a second arm extending from the base component in a second direction, wherein the first arm and the second arm are configured to retain an elongated item around the base component; and at least one securing element configured to secure the elongated item.

[00132] In some configurations, the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

[00133] In some configurations, each of the first arm and the second arm projects in height from the base component.

[00134] In some configurations, the first arm and the second arm extend at least substantially parallel to the base component.

[00135] In some configurations, the at least one securing element is configured to secure the elongated item against at least one of the first arm or the second arm.

[00136] In some configurations, the at least one securing element comprises a first securing element arranged on the first arm; and a second securing element arranged on the second arm.

[00137] In some configurations, the first securing element comprises a first flange extending in the first direction; and the second securing element comprises a second flange extending in the second direction.

[00138] In some configurations, the retaining structure is configured to be attached to a wall of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00139] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and the retaining structure as described herein, the retaining structure being attachable to the base unit.

[00140] In some configurations, the retaining structure is attachable to a rear wall or a side wall of the base unit.

[00141] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a portable display unit configured to removably connect to the base unit.

[00142] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a display unit is provided, the display unit comprising: a screen; and a graphical user interface configured to be displayed on the screen to display health information corresponding to a patient, wherein the graphical user interface is switchable between a plurality of display modes to display the health information differently in different display modes of the plurality of display modes.

[00143] In some configurations, the graphical user interface is customisable to display the health information differently in the different display modes.

[00144] In some configurations, for displaying the health information differently, the graphical user interface is configured to display the health information in different levels of detail in the different display modes.

[00145] In some configurations, the different levels of detail are customisable.

[00146] In some configurations, for displaying the health information differently, the graphical user interface is configured to display the health information in different character sizes in the different display modes.

[00147] In some configurations, the different character sizes are customisable.

[00148] In some configurations, for displaying the health information differently, the graphical user interface is configured to display the health information in different numbers of information panels in the different display modes.

[00149] In some configurations, the different numbers of information panels are customisable.

[00150] In some configurations, for displaying the health information differently, the graphical user interface is configured to display the health information in different layouts in the different display modes. [00151] In some configurations, the different layouts are customisable.

[00152] In some configurations, for displaying the health information differently, the graphical user interface is configured to display the health information in different densities in the different display modes.

[00153] In some configurations, the different densities are customisable.

[00154] In some configurations, the graphical user interface is configured to, in at least one display mode of the plurality of display modes, display at least a portion of the health information across a plurality of pages, each page of the plurality of pages being viewable one at a time on the screen, and the graphical user interface is configured for the plurality of pages to be changeable from one page of the plurality of pages to another page of the plurality of pages.

[00155] In some configurations, for each display mode of the plurality of display modes, the graphical user interface is configured to display the health information across the plurality of pages, each page of the plurality of pages being viewable one at a time on the screen, and the graphical user interface being configured for the plurality of pages to be changeable from one page of the plurality of pages to another page of the plurality of pages, and for displaying the health information differently, the graphical user interface is configured to display the health information in different numbers of pages in the different display modes.

[00156] In some configurations, the different numbers of pages are customisable.

[00157] In some configurations, the graphical user interface is configured to switch between the different display modes in response to a user input.

[00158] In some configurations, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch between the different display modes based at least partly on a user-proximity parameter that is suggestive or representative of a user's viewing distance from the display unit.

[00159] In some configurations, the user-proximity parameter is determined based on user interaction with the graphical user interface.

[00160] In some configurations, the user-proximity parameter is determined based on one or more sensors. [00161] In some configurations, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch between the different display modes based at least partly on a predefined distance category that is determined based on the user-proximity parameter.

[00162] In some configurations, the predefined distance category is determined from a plurality of predefined distance categories.

[00163] In some configurations, a respective display mode of the plurality of display modes is associated with a respective predefined distance category of the plurality of predefined distance categories.

[00164] In some configurations, a level of detail of the health information to be displayed on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter.

[00165] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a higher level of detail to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a lower level of detail.

[00166] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a lower level of detail to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a higher level of detail.

[00167] In some configurations, a character size of the health information to be displayed on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter.

[00168] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a smaller character size to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a larger character size.

[00169] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a larger character size to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a smaller character size.

[00170] In some configurations, a number of information panels which the health information is to be displayed in on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter.

[00171] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a larger number of information panels to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a smaller number of information panels.

[00172] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a smaller number of information panels to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a larger number of information panels.

[00173] In some configurations, a number of pages which at least a portion of the health information is to be displayed in on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter, each page being viewable one at a time on the screen and changeable to another page. [00174] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a smaller number of pages to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a larger number of pages.

[00175] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a larger number of pages to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a smaller number of pages.

[00176] In some configurations, a density of the health information to be displayed on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is determined at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter.

[00177] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a higher density to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a lower density.

[00178] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, the graphical user interface is configured to automatically switch from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a lower density to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a higher density.

[00179] In some configurations, the graphical user interface is configured to display the health information of a first type in a first region of the graphical user interface and the health information of a second type in a second region of the graphical user interface.

[00180] In some configurations, in at least one display mode of the plurality of display modes, parameters of the health information to be displayed in the at least one display mode are customisable.

[00181] In some configurations, at least one of a type of the parameters, a number of the parameters, a layout corresponding to the parameters, or a character size of characters corresponding to the parameters, is customisable.

[00182] In some configurations, the plurality of display modes comprise at least three different display modes.

[00183] In some configurations, the graphical user interface comprises a plurality of graphical elements operable by a user to provide a user input.

[00184] In some configurations, the graphical user interface comprises at least one graphical sliding bar that is operable by a user to provide a user input.

[00185] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar comprises: a scale; and an indicator movable along the scale, wherein the user input is defined by a position of the indicator on the scale.

[00186] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar has a predetermined range length relative to the scale.

[00187] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar has a range length relative to the scale, wherein one or more end limits of the range length are adjustable to customise the range length.

[00188] In some configurations, the graphical user interface comprises the at least one graphical sliding bar in a first portion of the graphical user interface, and the graphical user interface is configured to display a portion of the health information in a second portion of the graphical user interface.

[00189] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar comprises a graphical linear sliding bar or a graphical circular or curved or non-linear sliding bar.

[00190] In some configurations, the display unit further comprises or is in data communication with a controller. [00191] In some configurations, the controller is operable to control the health information to be displayed by the graphical user interface.

[00192] In some configurations, the controller is operable to respond to user interaction with the graphical user interface.

[00193] In some configurations, the controller is a dedicated graphical user interface engine or display controller.

[00194] In some configurations, the controller is integrated with or part of or in data communication with another controller of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00195] In some configurations, the controller is a software application executable on the other controller of the base unit.

[00196] In some configurations, the screen comprises a touchscreen.

[00197] In some configurations, the display unit is a portable display unit configured to removably connect to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00198] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and the display unit as described herein.

[00199] In some configurations, the base unit comprises a controller configured to receive data indicative of the health information and transmit the data to the display unit for displaying the health information on the graphical user interface on the screen.

[00200] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a computer-implemented method for a display unit is provided, the computer- implemented method for a display unit comprising: displaying, on a screen of the display unit, a graphical user interface displaying health information corresponding to a patient; and switching between a plurality of display modes, wherein the method further comprises displaying the health information differently in different display modes of the plurality of display modes. [00201] In some configurations, the graphical user interface is customisable to display the health information differently in the different display modes.

[00202] In some configurations, displaying the health information differently in the different display modes comprises displaying the health information in different levels of detail in the different display modes.

[00203] In some configurations, the different levels of detail are customisable.

[00204] In some configurations, displaying the health information differently in the different display modes comprises displaying the health information in different character sizes in the different display modes.

[00205] In some configurations, the different character sizes are customisable.

[00206] In some configurations, displaying the health information differently in the different display modes comprises displaying the health information in different numbers of information panels in the different display modes.

[00207] In some configurations, the different numbers of information panels are customisable.

[00208] In some configurations, displaying the health information differently in the different display modes comprises displaying the health information in different layouts in the different display modes.

[00209] In some configurations, the different layouts are customisable.

[00210] In some configurations, displaying the health information differently in the different display modes comprises displaying the health information in different densities in the different display modes.

[00211] In some configurations, the different densities are customisable.

[00212] In some configurations, in at least one display mode of the plurality of display modes, displaying at least a portion of the health information comprises displaying the health information across a plurality of pages on the graphical user interface, each page of the plurality of pages being viewable one at a time on the screen, and the method further comprises changing from one page of the plurality of pages to another page of the plurality of pages. [00213] In some configurations, for each display mode of the plurality of display modes, displaying the health information comprises displaying the health information across the plurality of pages, each page of the plurality of pages being viewable one at a time on the screen, and the method further comprising changing from one page of the plurality of pages to another page of the plurality of pages, and displaying the health information differently in the different display modes comprises displaying the health information in different numbers of pages in the different display modes.

[00214] In some configurations, the different numbers of pages are customisable.

[00215] In some configurations, switching between the plurality of display modes comprises switching between the plurality of display modes in response to a user input.

[00216] In some configurations, switching between the plurality of display modes comprises automatically switching between the different display modes based at least partly on a user-proximity parameter that is suggestive or representative of a user's viewing distance from the display unit.

[00217] In some configurations, the user-proximity parameter is determined based on user interaction with the graphical user interface.

[00218] In some configurations, the user-proximity parameter is determined based on one or more sensors.

[00219] In some configurations, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching between the different display modes based at least partly on a predefined distance category that is determined based on the user-proximity parameter.

[00220] In some configurations, the predefined distance category is determined from a plurality of predefined distance categories.

[00221] In some configurations, a respective display mode of the plurality of display modes is associated with a respective predefined distance category of the plurality of predefined distance categories.

[00222] In some configurations, a level of detail of the health information displayed on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter. [00223] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a higher level of detail to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a lower level of detail.

[00224] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a lower level of detail to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a higher level of detail.

[00225] In some configurations, a character size of the health information displayed on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter.

[00226] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a smaller character size to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a larger character size.

[00227] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a larger character size to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a smaller character size. [00228] In some configurations, a number of information panels which the health information is displayed in on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter.

[00229] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a larger number of information panels to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a smaller number of information panels.

[00230] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a smaller number of information panels to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a larger number of information panels.

[00231] In some configurations, a number of pages which at least a portion of the health information is displayed in on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter, each page being viewable one at a time on the screen and changeable to another page.

[00232] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a smaller number of pages to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a larger number of pages.

[00233] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a larger number of pages to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a smaller number of pages.

[00234] In some configurations, a density of the health information displayed on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes is determined at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter.

[00235] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a higher density to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a lower density.

[00236] In some configurations, in response to determination of the userproximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, automatically switching between the different display modes comprises automatically switching from one display mode of the plurality of display modes having a lower density to another display mode of the plurality of display modes levels having a higher density.

[00237] In some configurations, displaying the health information comprises displaying the health information of a first type in a first region of the graphical user interface and the health information of a second type in a second region of the graphical user interface.

[00238] In some configurations, in at least one display mode of the plurality of display modes, parameters of the health information displayed in the at least one display mode are customisable.

[00239] In some configurations, at least one of a type of the parameters, a number of the parameters, a layout corresponding to the parameters, or a character size of characters corresponding to the parameters, is customisable. [00240] In some configurations, the plurality of display modes comprise at least three different display modes.

[00241] In some configurations, the computer-implemented method further includes receiving a user input via a graphical element of a plurality of graphical elements of the graphical user interface, the plurality of graphical elements being selectable by a user.

[00242] In some configurations, the computer-implemented method further includes receiving a user input via at least one graphical sliding bar of the graphical user interface, the at least one graphical sliding bar being operable by a user to provide the user input.

[00243] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar comprises: a scale; and an indicator movable along the scale, wherein the user input is defined by a position of the indicator on the scale.

[00244] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar has a predetermined range length relative to the scale.

[00245] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar has a range length relative to the scale, wherein one or more end limits of the range length are adjustable to customise the range length.

[00246] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar is in a first portion of the graphical user interface, and a portion of the health information is displayed in a second portion of the graphical user interface.

[00247] In some configurations, receiving the user input via the at least one graphical sliding bar comprises receiving the user input via a graphical linear sliding bar or a graphical circular or curved or non-linear sliding bar.

[00248] In some configurations, the display unit comprises or is in data communication with a controller.

[00249] In some configurations, the controller is operable to control the health information displayed by the graphical user interface.

[00250] In some configurations, the controller is operable to respond to user interaction with the graphical user interface. [00251] In some configurations, the controller is a dedicated graphical user interface engine or display controller.

[00252] In some configurations, the controller is integrated with or part of or in data communication with another controller of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00253] In some configurations, the controller is a software application executing on the other controller of the base unit.

[00254] In some configurations, the screen comprises a touchscreen.

[00255] In some configurations, the display unit is a portable display unit configured to removably connect to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00256] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, there is provided a display for a screen associated with a respiratory therapy device, the display being configured to display a plurality of respiratory therapy parameters in a first view and a second view, the first view being different from the second view, the first view being suitable for viewing by a user closer to the screen than the second view, wherein, in the first view, a first subset of the plurality of parameters is displayed on a main portion of the display screen, and the remaining parameters are displayed on a secondary portion of the display screen, wherein, in the second view, a third subset of the plurality of parameters is displayed on the main portion of the display screen, and the remaining parameters are displayed on the secondary portion of the display screen, wherein the first subset comprises a greater number of parameters than the third subset, and wherein the display is configured to switch between the first and second views upon occurrence of a trigger.

[00257] In some configurations, in the second view, each parameter occupies a larger portion of the screen than in the first view.

[00258] In some configurations, the parameters displayed on the main portion are displayed in block or segment form, and the blocks or segments in the second view are larger than the blocks or segments in the first view.

[00259] In some configurations, the second portion of the display screen is a scrollable portion comprising a plurality of pages selectively scrollable by a user, each page displaying a subset of the remaining parameters. [00260] In some configurations, in the first view, each page of the scrollable portion displays a greater number of the remaining parameters than in the second view.

[00261] In some configurations, in the second view, there are a greater number of pages in the scrollable portion than in the first view.

[00262] In some configurations, the trigger is a predetermined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the screen.

[00263] In some configurations, the trigger is a manual input by a user.

[00264] In some configurations, the trigger is a signal from a proximity sensor indicating a change in a distance of the user from the screen.

[00265] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a display unit is provided, the display unit comprising: a screen; a display unit housing supporting the screen; and a graphical user interface configured to be displayed on the screen, wherein the display unit is configured to communicate with a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus, wherein the graphical user interface comprises a graphical adjustment tool, wherein a level of a parameter associated with a breathing therapy to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus is adjustable in response to a user input indicative of manipulation of the graphical adjustment tool, and wherein the display unit is configured for a user to provide the user input via a plurality of different input elements.

[00266] In some configurations, the plurality of different input elements comprise two or more of: (i) the screen comprising a touchscreen, and the level of the parameter being adjustable in response to a user touch interaction with the touchscreen at a region of the graphical user interface comprising the graphical adjustment tool to provide the user input; (ii) the display unit comprising a plurality of buttons, and the level of the parameter being adjustable in response to a user operating one or more buttons of the plurality of buttons to provide the user input; (iii) the display unit comprising a dial, and the level of the parameter being adjustable in response to a user rotating the dial to provide the user input.

[00267] In some configurations, the level of the parameter is adjustable to a higher level in response to the user operating a first button of the plurality of buttons, and the level of the parameter is adjustable to a lower level in response to the user operating a second button of the plurality of buttons.

[00268] In some configurations, the plurality of buttons comprise at least one of a plurality of physical buttons on the display unit housing or a plurality of graphical buttons provided by the graphical user interface.

[00269] In some configurations, the level of the parameter is adjustable to a higher level in response to the user rotating the dial in a first rotational direction, and the level of the parameter is adjustable to a lower level in response to the user rotating the dial in a second rotational direction.

[00270] In some configurations, the dial comprises: a rotatable component configured to be rotatable in the first and second rotational directions to adjust the level of the parameter; and a push button operable to confirm the user input.

[00271] In some configurations, the dial comprises a physical dial on the display unit housing.

[00272] In some configurations, the graphical adjustment tool comprises at least one graphical sliding bar.

[00273] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar comprises: a scale; and an indicator movable along the scale, wherein the user input is defined by a position of the indicator on the scale.

[00274] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar has a predetermined range length relative to the scale.

[00275] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar has a range length relative to the scale, wherein one or more end limits of the range length are adjustable to customise the range length.

[00276] In some configurations, the at least one graphical sliding bar comprises a graphical linear sliding bar or a graphical circular or curved or non-linear sliding bar.

[00277] In some configurations, the graphical user interface comprises a plurality of graphical adjustment tools corresponding to a plurality of parameters associated with the breathing therapy, and, for each graphical adjustment tool of the plurality of graphical adjustment tools, a level of a respective parameter of the plurality of parameters is adjustable in response to the user input indicative of manipulation of the graphical adjustment tool.

[00278] In some configurations, the plurality of graphical adjustment tools are selectively displayable on the screen.

[00279] In some configurations, the display unit is a portable display unit configured to removably connect to the base unit.

[00280] In some configurations, the parameter comprises a therapy setting.

[00281] In some configurations, the parameter comprises at least one of flow, pressure, fraction of inspired oxygen, temperature, or blood oxygen saturation.

[00282] In a further aspect of the disclosure, in accordance with certain features, aspects and advantages of at least one of the embodiments disclosed herein, a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and the display unit as described herein.

[00283] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus is a standalone humidifier apparatus, a continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP) apparatus, a high flow apparatus, or a ventilator for example.

[00284] In this specification, a "breathing assistance apparatus" may also be referred to as a "respiratory assistance apparatus". The breathing assistance apparatus provides a gases flow to a patient.

[00285] Features from one or more embodiments or configurations may be combined with features of one or more other embodiments or configurations. Additionally, more than one embodiment may be used together during a process of respiratory support of a patient.

[00286] It is intended that reference to a range of numbers disclosed herein (for example, 1 to 10) also incorporates reference to all rational numbers within that range (for example, 1, 1.1, 2, 3, 3.9, 4, 5, 6, 6.5, 7, 8, 9 and 10) and also any range of rational numbers within that range (for example, 2 to 8, 1.5 to 5.5 and 3.1 to 4.7) and, therefore, all sub-ranges of all ranges expressly disclosed herein are hereby expressly disclosed. These are only examples of what is specifically intended and all possible combinations of numerical values between the lowest value and the highest value enumerated are to be considered to be expressly stated in this application in a similar manner. [00287] It should be understood that alternative embodiments or configurations may comprise any or all combinations of two or more of the parts, elements or features illustrated, described or referred to in this specification.

[00288] This disclosure may also be said broadly to consist in the parts, elements and features referred to or indicated in the specification of the application, individually or collectively, and any or all combinations of any two or more said parts, elements or features, and where specific integers are mentioned herein which have known equivalents in the art to which this disclosure relates, such known equivalents are deemed to be incorporated herein as if individually set forth.

[00289] The term 'comprising' as used in this specification means 'consisting at least in part of'. When interpreting each statement in this specification that includes the term 'comprising', features other than that or those prefaced by the term may also be present. Related terms such as 'comprise' and 'comprises' are to be interpreted in the same manner.

[00290] As used herein the term '(s)' following a noun means the plural and/or singular form of that noun.

[00291] As used herein the term 'and/or' means 'and' or 'or', or where the context allows both.

[00292] As used herein, the phrase of the form of "at least one of A or B" may include A, or B, or both A and B. Correspondingly, the phrase of the form of "at least one of A, B or C", or including further listed items, may include the listed items individually, and any combinations of two or more of the listed items.

[00293] The disclosure consists in the foregoing and also envisages constructions of which the following gives examples only.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[00294] Specific embodiments and modifications thereof will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the detailed description herein having reference to the figures that follow, of which:

[00295] Figures 1 through 12 show example breathing assistance apparatuses configured to provide respiratory therapy to a user.

[00296] Figure 13 shows an additional example breathing assistance apparatus configured to provide a respiratory therapy to a user. [00297] Figure 14 is a front left perspective view of an example breathing assistance apparatus with a humidification chamber in position and a raised handle/lever.

[00298] Figure 15 is an exploded view of upper and lower chassis components of a main housing of the breathing assistance apparatus of Figure 14.

[00299] Figure 16 is a front left side perspective view of the lower chassis of the main housing of the breathing assistance apparatus of Figures 14 and 15 showing a heater plate assembly and other internal components. A front view a portable display unit that can be tethered to the breathing assistance apparatus is also shown.

[00300] Figure 17 is a front right perspective view of an alternative example breathing assistance apparatus.

[00301] Figure 18 is a front right perspective view of a shroud and removable elbow of the breathing assistance apparatus of Figure 17.

[00302] Figure 19 is a right side view of the removable elbow of the breathing assistance apparatus of various configurations.

[00303] Figure 20 is an overhead view of a screen carrier of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00304] Figure 21 is a front right perspective view of a first configuration of a portable display unit for use with any of the example breathing assistance apparatuses.

[00305] Figure 22 is an overhead view of the portable display unit of Figure 21.

[00306] Figure 23 is a front view of the portable display unit of Figures 21 and

22.

[00307] Figure 24 is a right side view of the portable display unit of Figures 21-

23.

[00308] Figure 25 is a rear view of the portable display unit of Figures 21-24.

[00309] Figure 26 is a rear underside perspective view of the portable display unit of Figures 21-25.

[00310] Figure 27 is a right side sectional view of the portable display unit of Figures 21-26. [00311] Figure 28 is a front right perspective view showing the portable display unit of Figures 21-27 connected to a screen carrier of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00312] Figure 29 is a front right perspective view showing a connection feature on the screen carrier of Figure 28.

[00313] Figure 30 is a view similar to Figure 28 but showing a configuration with a cable for tethering the portable display unit with the base unit of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00314] Figure 31 is a view similar to Figure 28 but schematically showing a change of the angular orientation of the screen of the portable display unit relative to the portable display unit housing, or schematically showing a change of the angular orientation of the portable display unit housing relative to the connection feature.

[00315] Figure 32 shows a removable cover for an exemplary portable display unit.

[00316] Figure 33 shows exemplary securing features of the removable cover of Figure 32.

[00317] Figure 34 is a front right perspective view of an alternative portable display unit.

[00318] Figure 35 is an overhead view of the portable display unit of Figure 34.

[00319] Figure 36 is a right side view of the portable display unit of Figures 34 and 35.

[00320] Figure 37 is a front view of the portable display unit of Figures 34-36.

[00321] Figure 38 is a rear view of the portable display unit of Figures 34-37.

[00322] Figure 39 is a front underside perspective view of the portable display unit of Figures 34-38 with a support feature in a first position.

[00323] Figure 40 is a front right perspective view showing the portable display unit of Figures 34-39 connected to the screen carrier of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00324] Figure 41 is a front right perspective view showing a connection feature on the screen carrier of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus. [00325] Figure 42 is an underside perspective view of the portable display unit of Figures 34-39 with the support feature in a second position.

[00326] Figure 43 shows the portable display unit of Figures 34-39 and 42 supported on a first support surface.

[00327] Figure 44 shows the portable display unit of Figures 34-39 and 42 supported on a second support surface.

[00328] Figure 45 shows the portable display unit of Figures 34-39 and 42 supported on a horizontal support surface.

[00329] Figure 46 shows an exemplary use of one of the exemplary portable display units.

[00330] Figure 47 shows other exemplary uses of one of the exemplary portable display units.

[00331] Figure 48 shows an exemplary configuration of a breathing assistance apparatus with two display units.

[00332] Figure 49 shows an exemplary use of a breathing assistance apparatus with two display units.

[00333] Figure 50 is a front right perspective view of an alternative portable display unit.

[00334] Figure 51 is an enlarged front right perspective view of a dial and buttons of the portable display unit of Figure 50.

[00335] Figure 52 is a cross-sectional view of the dial of Figure 51.

[00336] Figure 53 is a rear perspective view of the portable display.

[00337] Figure 54 is an exploded side view of the portable display unit.

[00338] Figure 55 is a rear overhead perspective view of a first configuration of a notification light of the portable display unit.

[00339] Figure 56 is a front overhead perspective view of a second configuration of a notification light of the portable display unit. [00340] Figure 57 is a perspective sectional view showing the engagement of the notification light with the display unit housing.

[00341] Figure 58 is a front right perspective view of an alternative breathing assistance apparatus base unit and an inspiratory conduit.

[00342] Figure 59 is an exploded front right perspective view of components of the base unit , including a display mounting component.

[00343] Figure 60 is a left front perspective view of part of the base unit including a display mounting component and an inspiratory conduit.

[00344] Figure 61 is a rear right perspective view of the inspiratory conduit and an interconnect circuit board of the base unit.

[00345] Figure 62 is a view of a first configuration of an interconnect circuit board and light elements.

[00346] Figure 63 is a view of a second configuration of an interconnect circuit board and light elements.

[00347] Figure 64 is a front left perspective view of the base unit and inspiratory conduit with the portable display unit connected to the base unit.

[00348] Figure 65 is a rear perspective view of an overmoulded portion that connects a cable to the portable display unit.

[00349] Figure 66 is a front perspective view of the overmoulded portion and part of the cable.

[00350] Figure 67 is a perspective view of a slot in the display unit housing for receipt of the overmoulded portion.

[00351] Figure 68 is a side sectional view of part of the base unit and connected portable display unit, showing cable connection features on the base unit.

[00352] Figure 69 is a rear right overhead perspective view of part of the base unit showing the cable connection features.

[00353] Figure 70 is a front right perspective view of a display mounting component of the base unit. [00354] Figure 71 is a front right overhead perspective view of the base unit showing alternative connection features.

[00355] Figure 72 is a front left overhead perspective view of the base unit showing alternative connection features.

[00356] Figure 73 shows a schematic view of a base unit with a pressure port.

[00357] Figures 74 to 77 show perspective views of breathing assistance apparatus base units with different arrangements of pressure ports.

[00358] Figures 78 to 81 show schematic views of different approaches for communication between a pressure prong and a corresponding sensor.

[00359] Figure 82 shows a partial view illustrating illumination of a pressure prong.

[00360] Figures 83 to 85 show perspective views of different pressure units.

[00361] Figures 86 and 87 show perspective views of electrical circuits of the pressure units of Figures 83-85.

[00362] Figures 88 and 89 show perspective views of a breathing assistance apparatus having a pressure unit.

[00363] Figure 90 shows a partial perspective view of a pressure orifice connected with a breathing circuit.

[00364] Figure 91 shows an exploded view of a pressure orifice.

[00365] Figure 92 shows a partial perspective view of a pressure orifice connected with a breathing circuit.

[00366] Figure 93 shows a schematic view of a breathing assistance apparatus having a pressure orifice.

[00367] Figure 94 shows a schematic perspective view of a common connecting structure for a plurality of sampling lines.

[00368] Figure 95 shows a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a portable display unit with a loosely fitted dial. [00369] Figure 96 shows a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a portable display unit with a reinforced dial.

[00370] Figure 97 shows a partial perspective view of a front casing of a display unit housing having a support wall.

[00371] Figure 98 shows a partial perspective view of a portable display unit with a cover over a dial of the portable display unit.

[00372] Figures 99 and 100 show a portable display unit having a button for disabling an alarm.

[00373] Figures 101 to 119 show different views of connection structures that are mountable to a support component.

[00374] Figures 120 and 121 show respective connection components having tapered portions.

[00375] Figure 122 shows a connection component of a portable display unit.

[00376] Figure 123 shows a perspective view of a retaining structure.

[00377] Figure 124 shows different views of a retaining structure retaining different elongated items, the retaining structure being mounted to a rear wall of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00378] Figures 125 to 135 show different views of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[00379] Figures 136 to 162 show non-limiting examples of graphical user interfaces displayable on a screen of a display unit.

[00380] Figure 163 shows a schematic view of a base unit with interchangeable coverings.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Breathing assistance apparatus

[00381] Figures 1 through 4 show example breathing assistance apparatuses or respiratory devices that can implement the features described herein. Each of the various systems described in Figures 1-4 can be used with the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000 described later in this specification. [00382] The exemplary breathing assistance apparatuses can each be considered to have a base unit and other components (e.g., a patient interface), and the base unit is represented in each example by reference numeral 50.

[00383] A main usage problem with a conventional breathing assistance apparatus is that that the breathing assistance apparatus has an integrated display that presents various therapy-related data and/or patient-related data to a user or clinician (e.g., respiratory rate of the patient, SpC readings, flow rate delivered by the apparatus and/or to the patient, pressure provided by the apparatus and/or to the patient, humidity level, dew point, or temperature of the flow of gases). An integrated display may also allow for the user or clinician to adjust therapy parameters or other settings of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00384] Breathing assistance apparatuses often include an integrated humidifier, which is used with a humidification chamber (e.g., filled with water) to add humidity to a flow of gases generated by a flow generator of the breathing assistance apparatus. In other cases, where a breathing assistance apparatus does not have an integrated humidifier, a separate, standalone humidifier unit may be connected to downstream of the breathing assistance apparatus. These arrangements will be described in greater detail later.

[00385] For safe use, the breathing assistance apparatus (with an integrated humidifier) and/or standalone humidifier are typically positioned at a level below a patient receiving therapy — e.g., below the bed level of the patient, or below the head of the patient. This positioning is to ensure that any condensate (i.e., moisture) formed in the tubes or conduits runs back into the humidifier, rather than toward the patient or back into the flow generator. Condensate that travels towards the patient can lead to discomfort due to liquid condensate entering and pooling in the patient interface and/or the patient's airways. In the worst case, liquid condensate could enter the lungs of the patient. Similarly, liquid condensate running back to a flow generator of the breathing assistance apparatus can damage electronics in the flow generator, cause short circuits or otherwise damage the flow generator, which can trigger therapy interruptions. Therapy interruptions can lead to adverse outcomes for patients.

[00386] For safety, the breathing assistance apparatus base unit is positioned below the bed so that the breathing assistance apparatus base unit with integrated humidifier is the lowest point within a breathing flow path (i.e. a breathing circuit). In conventional breathing assistance apparatuses with an integrated display this positioning means the display is often too low to be readily viewed by a clinician. The information on the screen should be easy to view by a user or clinician, in some cases even at a glance. However, the positioning of the device, and thus the integrated display, can make it difficult or challenging for a user or clinician to view the therapy data and/or adjust therapy parameters. This can make use of the breathing assistance apparatus difficult or otherwise unwieldy.

[00387] Breathing assistance apparatuses with an integrated display thus require users/clinicians to be in close proximity to the patient to monitor and adjust therapy parameters. This can have a few disadvantages. Firstly, it may increase the risk of infectious diseases being transmitted from the patient to the clinician due to their regular close proximity. By removing the display unit from the base unit of the breathing assistance apparatus as disclosed herein, the display unit can be moved away from close proximity to the patient, such as in a separate room, from where the therapy can be monitored and adjusted by the clinician. This allows for the spread of infectious diseases to be controlled within both hospital and home settings.

[00388] Another problem with such conventional breathing assistance apparatuses is that the integrated display and base unit arrangement means that the screen orientation of the display is dependent on the position of the breathing assistance apparatus base unit. In hospital rooms and wards there are often multiple pieces of medical equipment for each patient that are used simultaneously. Breathing assistance apparatuses are often positioned out of the way (i.e., in less prominent locations) so other equipment can be used on the patient. Thus, the integrated display may often be hidden out of view or positioned at an orientation that is difficult for a user or clinician to see. The data presented on the screen could be missed or not seen due to the positioning.

[00389] Similarly, a conventional breathing assistance apparatus with an integrated display intended for use by a patient at home needs to be positioned below the patient and somewhere visible so the patient can see information presented on the screen. This may limit the usability of the breathing assistance apparatus as it needs to be located within view of the patient. The apparatus may also need to be positioned within reach of the patient.

[00390] In some of the figures (e.g., Figures 1-3, 5, 13, 16, 17), the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is represented in broken lines as being tethered to the breathing assistance apparatuses. The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be tethered to the breathing assistance apparatus physically, physically for data communication, and/or wirelessly for data communication. [00391] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be physically tethered to the breathing assistance apparatus to enable power transfer (but not data) between the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus. As the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is an important piece of hardware, a high degree of reliability in terms of the power supply is required. Further, physically tethering the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 to the base unit 50 for data communication provides more reliable data communications and less interruptions or interference compared to using a wireless approach.

[00392] Further, by physically anchoring the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 to the base unit 50, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 minimises the risk of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 being misplaced or easily removed or the like.

[00393] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be physically tethered to the breathing assistance apparatus by a cable 3061, 4061 (see, for example, Figures 30, 48, 60, and 71).

[00394] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be wirelessly tethered or connected for one- or two-way data communication. The wireless communication may employ any suitable short-range wireless coupling techniques. Any suitable short range communication protocols can be used to link the base unit 50 with the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. Examples include Bluetooth, ZigBee, or any other suitable protocol.

[00395] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be paired to the base unit 50. The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 could be pre-paired with the base unit 50, for example upon manufacture, such that only that portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and that base unit 50 are able to be connected via wireless communication. The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and/or the base unit 50 may have a unique connection identifier which means that only that portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and that base unit 50 are able to be connected via wireless communication.

[00396] Alternatively, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be selectively/removably pairable with the base unit, 50 such that multiple portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000 may be able to be paired with the base unit 50, and portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000 may be removed from connection with the base unit 50 and paired with other base units 50. The wireless communications may also enable other devices to be connected to the base unit such as smartphones, tablets, or laptop computers for example. [00397] In this specification, 'data' refers to information that has been translated into a form that is efficient for movement (e.g., for communication or transmission) or processing. Relative to today's computing devices and transmission media, data is information converted into binary digital form. It is acceptable for the term 'data' to be used as a singular subject or a plural subject.

[00398] The data may comprise or consist of passive information that is acted on in some way — e.g., stored in memory, transmitted, and/or gathered (including, for example, received or captured from one or more sensors). The data may comprise or consist of control signals. Controls signals, in comparison to passive information, are active and cause a change in behaviour of an apparatus, device, or object.

[00399] In some configurations, the data can comprise or consist of data signals representing information to be displayed on a screen of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00400] The tethering may provide two-way data communication so that a user can control operation of the base unit 50 via the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00401] In some configurations, data signals and/or control signals are transmitted from the breathing assistance apparatus or the base unit thereof to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. In some configurations, data signals and/or control signals are transmitted from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 to the breathing assistance apparatus. In some configurations, power is transmitted from the breathing assistance apparatus to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. Any combination may be possible.

[00402] Turning to Figure 1, a schematic view of a patient or user 1303 receiving gases from a breathing assistance apparatus comprising a modular assisted breathing unit and humidifier system is shown. A conduit 1341 provides pressurized gases from an assisted breathing unit, flow generator, or blower unit 1301a to a humidifier 1310a comprising a humidification chamber 1302a. A heater plate assembly 1311a in the modular assisted breathing unit and humidifier system can be in thermal communication or contact with the humidification chamber 1302a to heat water in the chamber 1302a. Gases passing through the humidification chamber 1302a can be humidified and heated. Humidified, heated and pressurized gases exit the humidification chamber 1302a via an inspiratory conduit (or breathing conduit) 1321, and are provided to the patient or user 1303 via a patient interface 1304. The patient interface 1304 shown in Figure 1 is a nasal mask, which covers the nose of the user 1303. However, it should be noted that in systems of these types, a full face mask, nasal cannula, tracheostomy fitting, nasal pillows, oral interface, or any other suitable patient interface could be substituted for the nasal mask shown. The flow generator (or blower unit 1301a) may define a base unit 50, or the flow generator (or blower unit) 1301a and the humidifier 1310a may define the base unit 50.

[00403] Figure 2 shows a schematic view of the user 1303 receiving gases from a breathing assistance apparatus comprising an integrated flow generator/blower and humidifier unit 1305. The system generally operates in the same manner as the modular system shown in Figure 1 except that the humidifier 1310b has been integrated with a flow generator or blower unit 1301b to form the integrated unit 1305. The humidifier 1310b includes a humidification chamber 1302b that is removable from the integrated flow generator/blower and humidifier unit 13O5.The integrated blower/humidifier unit 1305 can include a heater plate assembly 1311b, integrated with the humidifier 1310b, configured to heat water in the chamber 1302b. An example of an integrated unit is described in PCT application WO 2008/056993 and US patent no. 8,555,879. The contents of those specifications are incorporated herein in their entirety by way of reference.

[00404] An example breathing assistance apparatus comprising an assisted breathing unit or integrated unit 1306 will now be described with reference to Figures 3 and 4.

[00405] The integrated unit 1306 can include two main parts: an assisted breathing, flow generator, or blower unit 1307 and a humidifier comprising a humidification unit 1331. When in use, the humidification unit 1331, which can include a humidification chamber, generally is enclosed within an enclosure that is formed in an external casing of the integrated unit 1306. In the illustrated configuration, the top part of the humidification unit 1331 is not enclosed within the enclosure 1342. The blower unit 1307 can include a heater plate assembly in thermal communication or contact with the humidification unit 1331 to heat water inside the humidification chamber.

[00406] The flow generator or blower unit 1307 has an outer shell that generally is a rectangular block or casing with substantially vertical side walls 1312a and vertical rear wall 1312b, and a front face (or front wall) 1312c that is angled slightly rearwards. In the illustrated embodiment, the walls 1312a, 1312b, 1312c, base and top surface are all manufactured and connected as far as possible to minimise the occurrence of seams. Any necessary seams can be sealed. This outer shell generally encloses the working parts of the blower unit 1307 and forms part of the blower unit 1307.

[00407] As shown in Figures 3 and 4, a user interface is located on the lower section of the front face of the illustrated integrated unit 1306 with a control display 1309 located directly above the user interface. The user interface can include a control knob 1308.

[00408] A patient outlet 1325 is shown passing out of the rear wall of the integrated unit 1306. In the illustrated embodiment, in use the free end of the outlet 1325 faces upwards for ease of connection. However, the patient outlet 1325 can be rotated to one side or to the other side to move or align it in a more convenient position for storage or to provide a more convenient use position.

[00409] The illustrated patient outlet 1325 is adapted to allow both pneumatic and electrical connection to one end of a conduit, for example, the conduit (such as the inspiratory conduit 1321 of Figure 2), that extends between the unit 1306 and a patient interface, for example, the interface 1304 of Figure 2. An example of the type of connector that can be used and the type of dual connection that can be made is described in US Patent No. 6,953,354, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. It should be noted that for the purposes of reading this specification, the patient interface generally can be thought of as including both the interface 1304 and the inspiratory conduit 1321 where it would be appropriate to read it in this manner.

[00410] The integrated unit 1306 can include an inlet vent or inlet port (not shown) to draw air in from atmosphere. The inlet port or vent could also be a connector adapted to receive gases from a wall source, pressurised bottle or the like. The integrated unit 1306 can also include a mechanism for providing a pressurized gas flow from the inlet vent to the humidification unit 1331. The pressurized gas flow mechanism can include a fan unit. The vent can be located wherever is convenient on the external surface of the integrated unit 1306. The vent can be located on the rear face of the blower unit 1307.

[00411] The gases are ducted or otherwise directed along a flow path through the casing of the blower unit 1307 and delivered to the humidification unit 1331, where the gases flow is humidified and heated by the heated water, before passing out of the humidification unit 1331 and onwards to the patient outlet 1325 on the blower unit 1307. The heated and humidified gases then pass to the user 1303 via the inspiratory conduit 1321 and a patient interface, which can include any suitable patient interface of the examples disclosed herein. [00412] The outlet port or patient outlet 1325 is adapted to enable both pneumatic attachment of the inspiratory conduit 1321 and electrical connection via an electrical connector. In Figure 3, a conduit connector 1334 that would normally be fitted to the end of the inspiratory conduit 1321 is shown connected to the patient outlet 1325. The outlet port or outlet connection does not have to be via the housing of the integrated unit 1306, as in the illustrated embodiment. Instead, the connection for the inspiratory conduit 1321 could be located directly on an outlet from humidification unit 1331. The illustrated form and variations generally can be referred to as connection mechanisms.

[00413] The integrated unit 1306 also contains electronic circuitry enclosed within the outer shell or casing, which at least partly comprises a controller, such as a microprocessor or the like, and which provides control signals to control the output or outputs of at least the blower unit 1307, and preferably other components or modules such as the humidification unit 1331. The control circuitry also can be adapted to receive signals from sensors in the system (for example, pressure, flow, humidity, and temperature signals from these sensors as applicable) and to alter outputs from the control circuitry based at least in part on these signals. The control circuitry also receives signals from user controls as the user controls are manipulated by a user and alters the output signals accordingly.

[00414] The breathing assistance apparatus shown in Figures 3, 4, and 5-8 can be controlled by the controller to provide pressure therapy. The blower can be controlled to provide continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP) therapy or bilevel pressure therapy or any other pressure therapy. Additionally or alternatively, the blower can be controlled to provide flow-controlled therapies such as nasal high flow therapy. The apparatus is used with a sealed mask to provide pressure therapy, for example a nasal mask or a full face mask or other sealed mask.

[00415] Figures 5 through 8 show further examples of breathing assistance apparatuses that can implement the features described herein. Again, each of the various systems described in Figures 5-8 can be used with the specific features described later in this application. Turning to Figure 5, a breathing assistance apparatus 1720 is shown. In the illustrated configuration, the breathing assistance apparatus 1720 is connected to an inspiratory conduit 1722 and the inspiratory conduit 1722 is connected to a patient interface 1724, such as a breathing mask or the like. Any suitable patient interface 1724 can be used.

[00416] The breathing assistance apparatus 1720 is configured to deliver a flow of pressurized breathing gases to the user through the conduit 1722 and the patient interface 1724. Accordingly, the illustrated breathing assistance apparatus 1720 can include a flow generator or blower unit 1726, which has been schematically illustrated in Figure 5. The blower unit 1726 can have any suitable construction. The blower unit draws ambient air into the breathing assistance apparatus 1720 and generates the flow of pressurized breathing gases.

[00417] The breathing assistance apparatus 1720 also is configured to humidify the flow of pressurized breathing gases prior to deliver to the user. Accordingly, as illustrated in Figure 6, the illustrated breathing assistance apparatus 1720 also can include a humidifier comprising a humidification chamber 1728. The humidification chamber 1728 can be removable from the breathing assistance apparatus 1720. Any suitable construction can be used for the humidification chamber 1728. The humidification chamber 1728 can be configured to contain a volume of liquid, such as water. The flow of pressurized breathing gases can pass over the volume of liquid en route to the user such that the flow of pressurized breathing gases can increase in humidity.

[00418] As illustrated, the breathing assistance apparatus 1720 generally can include a main body 1730. With reference to Figure 8, the main body 1730 can include an upper housing 1732 and a lower housing 1734. The upper housing 1732 and the lower housing 1734 can be secured together in any suitable manner. In some configurations, the bottom of the lower housing 1734 can be enclosed by a further cover.

[00419] With continued reference to Figure 8, the lower housing 1734 can include an air inlet 1736 through which the blower unit 1726 draws air. The blower unit 1726 can be mounted to or within the lower housing 1734. The lower housing 1734 also can support a heater plate assembly 1738. The liquid within the humidification chamber 1728 can be heated through an interaction with the heater plate assembly 1738. In some configurations, the humidification chamber 1728 can rest on a heating plate of the heater plate assembly 1738.

[00420] Other configurations are possible.

[00421] Figures 9 and 10 show even further examples of breathing assistance apparatuses that can implement the features described herein. Each of the various systems described in Figures 9 and 10 can be used with the specific features described later in this application. Figures 9 and 10 schematically illustrate examples of a humidification system or humidifier 2100 that, in some applications, can be used with breathing therapies, positive pressure apparatus, non-invasive ventilation, mechanical ventilation, and surgical procedures including but not limited to laparoscopy, and the like.

[00422] Desirably, the humidification system 2100 can be adapted to add humidity to a supply of gases passing through. The humidification system 2100 can be used with ventilators, nasal high flow systems, continuous, variable, or bi-level positive airway pressure (PAP) systems, and other systems that provide other forms of respiratory therapy. In some configurations, the humidification system 2100 can be integrated into a system that delivers any such types of therapy.

[00423] An example of the humidification system 2100 can include a heater base unit 2102 and a humidification chamber 2104. The heater base unit 2102 can comprise a heater plate assembly 2108. The humidification chamber 2104 can be configured to hold a volume of a liquid, such as water. The heater plate assembly 2108 can be configured to heat the volume of liquid held within the humidification chamber 2104 to produce water vapor within the chamber 2104, either by being in thermal communication with the humidification chamber or by contacting the humidification chamber.

[00424] The humidification chamber 2104 is removable from the heater base 2102 to allow the humidification chamber 2104 to be more readily sterilized or disposed. The body of the humidification chamber 2104 can be formed from a non-conductive glass or plastics material but the humidification chamber 2104 can also include conductive components. For instance, the humidification chamber 2104 can include a highly heat- conductive base (for example, an aluminium base) contacting or associated with the heater plate assembly 2108 on the heater base unit 2102.

[00425] The heater base unit 2102 can also include electronic controls. In this example, the heater base unit 2102 includes a master controller 2025. The master controller 2025 can comprise an electronic, analog, or digital processor or controller. Preferably, the master controller 2025 comprises a microprocessor-based controller configured to execute computer software commands stored in associated memory. In response to user-set humidity or temperature values input via a user interface 2133, for example, and other inputs, the master controller 2025 determines when (or to what level) to energize a heating element of the heater plate assembly 2108 to heat the liquid within the humidification chamber 2104.

[00426] In some configurations, a humidification system 2100 comprises a humidifier comprising the heater base unit 2102 and humidification chamber 2104, an inspiratory conduit 2120, and optionally a patient interface 2128. In some configurations, the humidification system 2100 can comprise an expiratory conduit.

[00427] The humidifier can be used in various types of therapies e.g. invasive ventilation, non-invasive ventilation, nasal high flow, and CPAP for example. The humidifier is a standalone unit that is used with a gases supply e.g. wall gases source or a ventilator or other gases source.

[00428] The humidifier will typically be positioned below patient bed level to allow any condensate that may form in the inspiratory conduit and/or patient interface to run down into the humidifier.

[00429] The humidification system 2100 also can include a gases supply 2125. In some configurations, the gases supply 2125 can comprise a flow generator, ventilator, blower unit, or any other source of pressurized gases suitable for breathing or use in medical procedures. The gases supply 2125 can be separate from or combined with the heater base 2102. For example, as shown in Figure 10, dry or relatively dry gases, or ambient air, enter the gases supply 2125 through a vent 2119. A fan 2121 can improve gas flow into the gases supply by drawing air or other gases through the vent 2119. The fan 2121 can be, for instance, a variable speed fan, where a controller 2023 controls the fan speed. In particular, the function of the controller 2023 can be controlled by the master controller 2025 in response to inputs from the master controller 2025 and a user-set predetermined required value (preset value) of pressure or fan speed via a dial 2027.

[00430] The humidification system also can include a breathing circuit 2123 in fluid communication with the humidifier. The breathing circuit 2123 can include an inspiratory conduit 2120. A chamber end of the inspiratory conduit 2120 can be configured to connect to an outlet port 2412 of the humidification chamber 2104. A patient end of the inspiratory conduit 2120 can be configured to connect to the patient, for example, via a patient interface 2128 to deliver gases to a patient. In some configurations, the inspiratory conduit 2120 can be coupled directly to the patient interface 2128. Any suitable type of the patient interface 2128 can be incorporated. Patient interface is a broad term and is to be given its ordinary and customary meaning to a person of ordinary skill in the art (that is, it is not to be limited to a special or customized meaning) and includes, without limitation, masks (such as tracheal masks, face masks and nasal masks), cannulas, and nasal pillows.

[00431] A temperature probe 2135 can connect to the inspiratory conduit 2120 near the patient interface 2128, or directly to the patient interface 2128. The temperature probe 2135 monitors the temperature near or at the patient interface 2128.

[00432] A heating element (not shown), for example, a heating element that is associated with the temperature probe or a heating element not associated with a temperature probe, can be used to adjust the temperature of the patient interface 2128 and/or the inspiratory tube 2120 to raise the temperature of the inspiratory conduit 2120 and/or the patient interface 2128 above the saturation temperature, thereby reducing the opportunity for unwanted condensation.

[00433] In some configurations in which the flow generator or gases supply 2125 is separate from the heater base unit 2102, the breathing circuit 2123 can include a supply conduit 2132. A gases supply end of the supply conduit 2132 can be configured to connect to an output of the gases supply 2125. A chamber end of the supply conduit 2132 can be configured to connect to an inlet port 2410 of the humidification chamber 2104.

[00434] In some configurations, such as those used with a ventilator, the breathing circuit 2123 can also include an expiratory conduit 2122. A user end of the expiratory conduit 2122 can be configured to connect to the patient interface 2128, and a gases supply end of the expiratory conduit 2122 can be configured to connect to a return of the gases supply 2125. The expiratory conduit 2122 can have a temperature probe and/or heating element, as described above with respect to the inspiratory conduit 2120, integrated with it to reduce the opportunity for condensation. Furthermore, the expiratory conduit 2122 need not return exhaled gases to the gases supply 2125. In some configurations, exhaled gases can be passed directly to ambient surroundings or to other ancillary equipment, such as an air scrubber/filter (not shown). The expiratory conduit 2122 may be omitted altogether.

[00435] As shown in Figure 9, the user ends of the inspiratory conduit 2120 and the expiratory conduit 2122 can be connected to each other via a Y-piece 2124. The Y-piece 2124 can be connected to a patient supply conduit 2126. In some configurations, the patient supply conduit 2126 can include a catheter mount, for example but without limitation. The patient supply conduit 2126 can be connected to the patient interface 2128. The Y-piece 2124 may couple to the patient interface 2128 without the patient supply conduit 2126 intervening.

[00436] In use, the humidification chamber 2104 is installed onto a heating plate of the heater plate assembly 2108, to be in thermal communication with the heater plate assembly or to contact the heater plate assembly. The heater plate assembly 2108 heats liquid, such as water, in the humidification chamber 2104 to produce vapor. Dry or relatively dry gases flow from the gases supply 2125, through the supply conduit 2132, and into the humidification chamber 2104 through the inlet port 2410. The gases pass over the liquid in the humidification chamber 2104 and become humidified by the vapor. Humidified gases exit the humidification chamber 2104 through the outlet port 2412 and flow through the inspiratory conduit 2120 to a patient 2101. Gases exhaled by the patient 2101 may be returned to the gases supply 2125 through the expiratory conduit 2122. Any or all of the components of the breathing circuit 2123 can include a heating element, for example, a heating wire 2127, to help maintain the gases at a desired temperature and to reduce the likelihood of significant condensation formation in the conduits.

[00437] Figures 11 and 12 show an example of a heater base 2102 (i.e. base unit). The heater base unit (i.e. base unit) 2102 is used as part of a humidifier or humidification system 2100 as shown in figures 9 and 10. The heater base 2102 comprises a heater plate assembly 2108, as described earlier. The heater base 2102 comprises a receptacle 2106 to receive a humidification chamber. The humidification chamber is heated by the heater plate assembly to generate humidity, as described herein.

[00438] The heater base 2102 comprises a vertical column 2110 (i.e. vertical wall) that extends from the base. A sensing module 2111 (i.e. sensor cartridge), as shown in Figures 11 and 12 is located on the vertical column 2110. The sensing module 2111 is removably connectable to the vertical column 2110 via one or more couplers (not shown). The sensing module comprises one or more sensors. The sensors can be inserted into the gases flow and/or interact with the chamber to sense properties of gases. In one example the sensing module 2111 (i.e. sensor cartridge) comprises at least one flow sensor and at least one temperature sensor. The module 2111 may comprise multiple flow and temperature sensors.

[00439] The heater base 2102 comprises a display unit 3500. The display unit 3500 comprises a housing 3502. The display unit 3500 comprises a display screen 3504 and one or more physical user interface features 3506 such as for example push buttons or one or more dials, etc. The display screen 3504 may be a touchscreen that allows a user to input commands to the humidifier 2100 via the touchscreen display screen 3504. The housing 3502 may be removable by using an appropriate tool, by a technician e.g., a hospital technician or maintenance engineer. The housing 3502 may be removed and replaced with a different housing that engages with the display unit and/or engages with the vertical column. Alternatively, the display unit 3500 may be a removable display unit as described. The display unit 3500 may be removable for replacement and/or may be removable so it can be moved to a more visible location.

[00440] The housing 3502 comprises a light bar 3506. The light bar 3506 extends along a portion of the housing. The light bar 3506 as shown in Figures 11, 12 is flush with the housing 3502 and follows the shape and contour of the housing 3502. Alternatively the light bar 3506 may project outwardly from the housing. The light bar 3506 is elongate in shape, and in the illustrated example is a substantially rectangular. The light bar 3506 may alternatively be cylindrical or any other suitable shape. The light bar 3506 is preferably integrated into the housing. The light bar 3506 is centrally positioned in housing 3502, and centrally positioned relative to the display unit 3500. As shown in Figures 11-12 the light bar 3506 is positioned in the housing 3502 above the display screen 3504. The light bar 3506 is positioned on a rounded portion of a periphery of the housing 3502. The light bar 3506 preferably defines a portion of an upper edge (i.e. upper peripheral region) of the housing 3502. The display unit 3500 comprises one or more lights e.g. LEDs that are located on a PCB within the display unit. The LEDs are positioned adjacent the light bar so that light from the LEDs projects out of the light bar The light bar may be white in colour or may have a specific colour. The display unit 3500 comprises multiple LEDs of different colours. The various colours are used to denote various alarm states. For example activation of a red LED in the display unit 3500 causes the light bar 3506 to light red, denoting a critical alarm or a high priority alarm. In another example activation of yellow LED in the display unit causes the light bar to light yellow, denoting a medium priority alarm. The light bar is preferably made from a plastics material that allows projection of light or other suitable materials such as glass or quartz or crystal. The LEDs may be mounted on an internal PCB. Optionally the display 3500 may comprise one or more light pipes that direct light from the LED to the light bar such that the light from the LEDs is projected out of the light bar 3506.

[00441] In an alternative construction, the display unit 3500 may comprise a plurality of light bars disposed on the housing. The light bars may be equally spaced or may be unequally spaced. The light bars may be positioned at the top or upper section of the housing 3502 or may be positioned at various locations around the housing. In a further alternative the housing 3502 comprises bezel (i.e. a peripheral casing) 3502a that surrounds the display screen 3504. The bezel 3502a may be removable and replaceable. The bezel 3502a (i.e. peripheral casing) may be removed by an appropriate tool. Multiple bezels may be used with the display unit for example, a bezel with an integrated light bar 3506 or a bezel with no light bar or a bezel with multiple light bars. [00442] The light bar 3506 is advantageous because it makes the display unit 3500 more visible and makes communication of information to a user e.g. a clinician simpler. The light bar makes alarm communication simpler. This is useful as humidifiers as positioned below a bed level of the patient i.e. at the lowest point. Further when the removable display unit with the light bar also makes communication of information e.g. alarm information simpler and more clear.

[00443] A schematic representation of an example breathing assistance apparatus 10 is provided in Figure 13. The apparatus 10 could, for example, be a CPAP apparatus or a high flow apparatus. An exemplary CPAP apparatus is described in WO 2011/056080 and US patent no. 11,110,246. The contents of those specifications are incorporated herein in their entirety by way of reference.

[00444] A CPAP apparatus is a gases supply and optionally gases humidification apparatus. The apparatus is operable to provide respiratory assistance to patients or users who require a supply of gas (humidified or otherwise) at positive pressure for the treatment of diseases such as Obstructive Sleep Apnea (OSA), snoring, or Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease (COPD) and the like. Bilevel pressure therapy may also be used to treat COPD or other respiratory conditions. CPAP apparatuses often include a humidifier with a heater plate and a chamber bay for a humidification chamber containing liquid, so as to form a combined assisted breathing unit and humidifier.

[00445] CPAP apparatuses, when used with a humidifier, typically have a structure where gases at a required pressure are delivered from an assisted breathing unit or blower unit to a humidification chamber downstream from the blower. As the gases pass through the humidification chamber, they become saturated with liquid vapour (e.g., water vapour). A flexible tubular gases conduit delivers the gases to a user or patient downstream from the humidification chamber.

[00446] The configuration shown in Figure 13 may be a high flow apparatus. The controller of the apparatus may be configured to control the blower and humidifier of the apparatus accordingly, e.g., to provide high flow therapy. A high flow apparatus may be used to deliver a high gas flow or high flow therapy to a patient to assist with breathing and/or treat breathing disorders including chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), or other respiratory conditions where patients struggle to breathe or are in respiratory distress. The apparatus may be used for nasal high flow or tracheal high flow.

[00447] Further, nasal high flow can also be used in anaesthetic applications, for example to pre-oxygenate patients prior to sedation and once patients are woken from sedation (e.g., post-sedation oxygenation). Nasal high flow may also be used for postextubation respiratory support.

[00448] A high flow apparatus includes a gases supply and typically includes a humidification apparatus.

[00449] Breathing assistance apparatuses typically have and/or are typically used with one or more accessories such as a breathing conduit (or inspiratory conduit) and a patient interface such as a cannula or mask for delivering gases to a patient. The conduit enables gases to be delivered from the housing of the breathing assistance apparatus to the patient. For example, the apparatus may be placed on a floor or other support surface, and the patient may be in a bed. The breathing assistance apparatus may have a recess or chamber bay for receipt of a humidification chamber. The humidification chamber may receive liquid from, for example, a flexible liquid bag that delivers liquid to a humidification chamber via one or more tubes. Alternatively, the humidification chamber can be removed and refilled manually as required. The recess will contain a heater plate to heat the humidification chamber, to humidify gases passing through the humidification chamber. The humidified gases are then delivered to the patient.

[00450] The breathing assistance apparatus 10 can include a main device housing 100 which can be part of by a base unit of the system. The main device housing 100 can contain a flow generator or blower unit 11 that can be in the form of a motor/impeller arrangement, an optional humidifier comprising a humidification chamber 12, a controller 13, and a user interface 14. As discussed below, the user interface may be provided by a portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. The user interface 14 used for this or any other described breathing assistance apparatuses can include a display and input device(s) such as button(s), dial(s), a touch screen, a combination of a touch screen and button(s) and/or dial(s), or the like. The controller 13 can include one or more hardware and/or software processors and can be configured or programmed to control the components of the apparatus, including but not limited to: operating the blower unit 11 to create a flow of gases for delivery to a patient, operating the humidifier having the humidification chamber 12 (if present) to humidify and/or heat the gases flow, receiving user input from the user interface 14 for reconfiguration and/or user-defined operation of the respiratory system 10, and outputting information (for example on the display) to the user. The user can be a patient, healthcare professional, or others. [00451] With continued reference to Figure 13, an inspiratory conduit 16 can be coupled to a gases flow outlet 21 in the main device housing 100 of the respiratory system 10, and be coupled to a patient interface 17, such as a non-sealing interface like a nasal cannula with a manifold 19 and nasal prongs 18. The inspiratory conduit 16 can also be coupled to a face mask, a nasal mask, a nasal pillow mask, an unsealed tracheostomy interface, or others.

[00452] The gases flow can be generated by the blower unit 11, and may be humidified, before being delivered to the patient via the inspiratory conduit 16 through the patient interface 17. The controller 13 can control the blower unit 11 to generate a gases flow of a desired flow rate, and/or one or more valves to control mixing of air and oxygen or other breathable gas. The controller 13 can control a heating element beneath the humidification chamber 12 to heat the gases to a desired temperature that achieves a desired level of temperature and/or humidity for delivery to the patient. The inspiratory conduit 16 can have a heating element 16a, such as a heater wire, to heat gases flow passing through to the patient. The heating element 16a can also be under the control of the controller 13.

[00453] The apparatus 10 can use ultrasonic transducer(s), thermistor(s), pressure sensor(s), temperature sensor(s), humidity sensor(s), or other sensors, in communication with the controller 13, to monitor characteristics of the gases flow and/or operate the apparatus 10 in a manner that provides suitable therapy. The gases flow characteristics can include gases concentration(s), flow rate, pressure, temperature, humidity, or others. The sensors 3a, 3b, 3c, 20, 25, such as gases concentration, flow, temperature, humidity, and/or pressure sensors, can be placed in various locations in the main device housing 100, the inspiratory conduit 16, and/or the patient interface 17. The controller 13 can receive output from the sensors to assist it in operating the respiratory system 10 in a manner that provides suitable therapy, such as to determine a suitable target temperature, flow rate, and/or pressure of the gases flow. Providing suitable therapy can include meeting a patient's inspiratory demand.

[00454] The apparatus 10 can include a wireless data transmitter and/or receiver, or a transceiver 15 to enable the controller 13 to receive data 8 in a wireless manner from the operation sensors and/or to control the various components of the apparatus 10. Additionally, or alternatively, the transmitter and/or receiver 15 can deliver data to a remote server. Additionally, or alternatively, the data transmitter and/or receiver 15 can receive data from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and/or can transmit data to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. The data may comprise or consist of control signals. That can enable remote control of the apparatus 10 by the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and/or can provide data and/or control signals to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 for display and user feedback.

[00455] The apparatus 10 can additionally include a wired connection, for example, using one or more cables or wires, to enable the controller 13 to receive data and/or control signals 8 from the operation sensors and/or to control the various components of the apparatus 10. For example, the apparatus 10 can use the wired connection to transmit power from the base unit of the apparatus to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and/or to transmit data from the base unit to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and data from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 to the controller 13 of the base unit. As outlined above, the data may comprise or consist of control signals.

[00456] The breathing assistance apparatus 10 can be used in a variety of applications. For instance, the apparatus 10 can be any of the following breathing assistance apparatuses or respiratory apparatuses: a continuous positive air pressure (CPAP) device, a ventilator, a humidifier, a high flow therapy device, a surgical humidifier (for example, an insufflator), combinations of the same, or the like.

[00457] CPAP treatment of obstructive sleep apnea involves the delivery of pressurized, breathable gas, usually air, to a user's airways using an inspiratory conduit and a patient interface, such as a mask. The gas pressures employed for CPAP typically range from about 4 cm H2O to about 28 cm H2O at flow rates of up to about 180 L/min (measured at the patient interface), depending upon the requirements of the user. The pressurized gas acts as a pneumatic splint for the airway of the user. As such, the pressurized gas reduces the likelihood of collapsing of the airway.

[00458] The breathing assistance apparatus 10 may be a high flow therapy apparatus. High flow therapy as discussed herein is intended to be given its typical ordinary meaning as understood by a person of skill in the art, which generally refers to a respiratory assistance system delivering a targeted flow of humidified respiratory gases via an intentionally unsealed patient interface with flow rates generally intended to meet or exceed inspiratory flow of a patient. Typical patient interfaces include, but are not limited to, a nasal or tracheal patient interface. Typical flow rates for adults often range from, but are not limited to, about fifteen liters per minute (LPM) to about seventy liters per minute or greater. Typical flow rates for pediatric patients (such as neonates, infants and children) often range from, but are not limited to, about one liter per minute per kilogram of patient weight to about three liters per minute per kilogram of patient weight or greater. High flow therapy can also optionally include gas mixture compositions including supplemental oxygen and/or administration of therapeutic medicaments. High flow therapy is often referred to as nasal high flow (NHF), humidified high flow nasal cannula (HHFNC), high flow nasal oxygen (HFNO), high flow therapy (HFT), or tracheal high flow (THF), among other common names. The flow rates used to achieve 'high flow' may be any of the flow rates listed below.

[00459] High flow therapy may be administered to the nares of a user and/or orally, or via a tracheostomy interface. High flow therapy may deliver gases to a user at a flow rate at or exceeding the intended user's peak inspiratory flow requirements. The high flow therapy may generate a flushing effect in the nasopharynx such that the anatomical dead space of the upper airways is flushed by the high incoming gases flow. This can create a reservoir of fresh gas available for each and every breath, while minimizing re-breathing of nitrogen and carbon dioxide. Meeting inspiratory demand and flushing the airways is additionally important when trying to control the patient's blood oxygen levels. High flow therapy can be delivered with a non-sealing patient interface such as, for example, a nasal cannula. The nasal cannula may be configured to deliver breathing gases to the nares of a user at a flow rate exceeding the intended user's peak inspiratory flow requirements.

[00460] Nasal high flow provides dynamic pressure to a patient in synchrony to the breathing of the patient. For example, nasal high flow being provided to a patient can increase pressure during the expiratory phase of a patient. This can reduce the respiratory rate of the patient and reduce respiratory effort of the patient. Reduced respiratory effort and respiratory rate are helpful to a patient with respiratory conditions e.g., COPD.

[00461] The term 'non-sealing patient interface' as used herein can refer to an interface providing a pneumatic link between an airway of a patient and a gases flow source (such as from flow generator 11) that does not completely occlude the airway of the patient. A non-sealed pneumatic link can comprise an occlusion of less than about 95% of the airway of the patient. The non-sealed pneumatic link can comprise an occlusion of less than about 90% of the airway of the patient. The non-sealed pneumatic link can comprise an occlusion of between about 40% and about 80% of the airway of the patient. The airway can include one or more of a naris or mouth of the patient. For a nasal cannula the airway is through the nares.

[00462] Figures 14 through 16 show an example breathing assistance apparatus embodying the apparatus 10 having a base unit 50 with a main housing 100, which can implement the features described herein. The main housing 100 has a main housing upper chassis 102 and a main housing lower chassis 202. The main housing upper chassis 102 has a peripheral wall arrangement 106 (see Figure 15). The peripheral wall arrangement defines a humidification chamber bay 108 for receipt of a removable humidification chamber 300 to form a humidifier. The removable humidification chamber 300 contains a suitable liquid such as water for humidifying gases that can be delivered to a patient.

[00463] In the form shown, the peripheral wall arrangement 106 of the main housing upper chassis 102 can include a substantially vertical left side outer wall 110 that is oriented in a front-to-rear direction of the main housing 100, a substantially vertical left side inner wall 112 that is oriented in a front-to-rear direction of the main housing 100, and an interconnecting wall 114 that extends between and interconnects the upper ends of the left side inner and outer walls 110, 112.

[00464] The main housing upper chassis 102 can further include a substantially vertical right side outer wall 116 that is oriented in a front-to-rear direction of the main housing 100, a substantially vertical right side inner wall 118 that is oriented in a front- to-rear direction of the main housing 100, and an interconnecting wall 120 that extends between and interconnects the upper ends of the right side inner and outer walls 116, 118. The interconnecting walls 114, 120 are angled towards respective outer edges of the main housing 100 but can alternatively be substantially horizontal or inwardly angled.

[00465] The main housing upper chassis 102 can further include a substantially vertical rear outer wall 122. An upper part of the main housing upper chassis 102 can include a forwardly angled surface 124. The surface 124 can have a recess 126 for receipt of a display and user interface module 14. The display can be configured to display characteristics of sensed gas(es) in real time. An interconnecting wall 128 can extend between and interconnect the upper end of the rear outer wall 122 and the rear edge of the surface 124.

[00466] A substantially vertical wall portion 130 can extend downwardly from a front end of the surface 124. A substantially horizontal wall portion 132 can extend forwardly from a lower end of the wall portion 130 to form a ledge. A substantially vertical wall portion 134 can extend downwardly from a front end of the wall portion 132 and terminate at a substantially horizontal floor portion 136 of the humidification chamber bay 108. The left side inner wall 112, right side inner wall 118, wall portion 134, and floor portion 136 together can define the humidification chamber bay 108. The floor portion 136 of the humidification chamber bay 108 can have a recess 138 to receive a heater arrangement such as a heater plate assembly 140 or other suitable heating mechanisms for heating liquid in the humidification chamber 300 for use during a humidification process.

[00467] The main housing lower chassis 202 can be attachable to the upper chassis 102, either by suitable fasteners or integrated attachment features such as clips for example. The main housing lower chassis 202 can include a substantially vertical left side outer wall 210 that is oriented in a front-to-rear direction of the main housing 100 and is contiguous with the left side outer wall 110 of the upper chassis 102, and a substantially vertical right side outer wall 216 that is oriented in a front-to-rear direction of the main housing 100 and is contiguous with the right side outer wall 116 of the upper chassis 102. The main housing lower chassis 202 can further include a substantially vertical rear outer wall 222 that is contiguous with the rear outer wall 122 of the upper chassis 102.

[00468] The lower housing chassis 202 can have a lip 242 that is contiguous with the lip 142 of the upper housing chassis 102, and also forms part of the recess for receiving the handle portion 506 of the lever 500. The lower lip 242 can include a forwardly directed protrusion 243 that acts as a retainer for the handle portion 506 of the lever 500. Instead of the lever 500, the system can have a spring-loaded guard to retainer the humidification chamber 300 in the humidification chamber bay 108.

[00469] An underside of the lower housing chassis 202 can include a bottom wall 230. Respective interconnecting walls 214, 220, 228 can extend between and interconnect the substantially vertical walls 210, 216, 222 and the bottom wall 230. The bottom wall 230 can include a grill 232 comprising a plurality of apertures to enable drainage of liquid in case of leakage from the humidification chamber 300 (for example from spills). The bottom wall 230 additionally can include elongated forward-rearward oriented slots 234. The slots 234 can additionally enable drainage of liquid in case of leakage from the humidification chamber 300, without the liquid entering the electronics housing. In the illustrated configuration, the slots 234 can be wide and elongate relative to the apertures of the grill 232 to maximize the drainage of liquid.

[00470] The lower chassis 202 can have a motor recess 250 for receipt of a motor module. The motor module may comprise one or more sensors for sensing parameters of gas flow through the motor. The motor module can be removable or not removable from the main housing 100 (not shown). All of the walls and the ceiling 262 can be continuous, gas impermeable, and unbroken other than the gases flow passage. Therefore, the entire motor recess 250 can be gas impermeable and unbroken, other than the gases flow passage.

[00471] The motor module can be insertable into the recess 250 and attachable to the lower chassis 202. Upon insertion of the motor module into the lower chassis 202, the gases flow passage tube 264 can extend through the downward extension tube 133 and be sealed by the soft seal.

[00472] The humidification chamber 300 can be fluidly coupled to the base unit of the apparatus 10 in a linear slide-on motion in a rearward direction of the humidification chamber 300 into the humidification chamber bay 108, from a position at the front of the housing 100 in a direction toward the rear of the housing 100. A gases outlet port 322 can be in fluid communication with the motor.

[00473] The humidification chamber gases inlet port 306 can be complementary with the gases outlet port 322, and the humidification chamber gases outlet port 308 can be complementary with the gases inlet port 340. The axes of those ports can be parallel to each other to enable the humidification chamber 300 to be inserted into the humidification chamber bay 108 in a linear movement. The respiratory device can have air and oxygen (or alternative auxiliary gas) inlets in fluid communication with the motor to enable the motor to deliver air, oxygen (or alternative auxiliary gas), or a mixture thereof to the humidification chamber 300 and thereby to the patient.

[00474] The main housing 100 of the base unit forms a common housing for the flow generator/motor and the humidifier.

[00475] As shown schematically in Figure 16, the lower housing chassis 202 can include suitable electronics board(s) 272. The electronic(s) boards 272 will typically be circuit board(s). At least one of the electronics board(s) 272 may comprise a main circuit board of the base unit 50. The, or at least one of, the circuit boards 272 may comprise sensing circuit board(s). The circuit board(s) 272 may comprise printed circuit board(s) (PCB).

[00476] In some configurations, the circuit board(s) 272 may be provided between an inner casing portion and an outer casing portion.

[00477] The electronics boards can be positioned adjacent respective outer side walls 210, 216 of the lower housing chassis 202. The electronics boards 272 can contain, or can be in electrical communication with, suitable electrical or electronics components, such as but not limited to microprocessors, capacitors, resistors, diodes, operational amplifiers, comparators, and switches. Sensors can be used with the electronic boards 272. Components of the electronics boards 272 (such as but not limited to one or more microprocessors) can act as the controller 13 of the apparatus.

[00478] One or both of the electronics boards 272 can be in electrical communication with the electrical components of the apparatus 10, including the display unit and user interface 14, motor, valve and the heater plate assembly 140, to operate the motor to provide the desired flow rate of gases, operate the humidification chamber 12 to humidify and heat the gases flow to an appropriate level, and supply appropriate quantities of oxygen (or quantities of an alternative auxiliary gas) to the gases flow.

[00479] The electronics boards 272 can be in electrical communication with a connector arrangement 274 projecting from the rear wall 122 of the upper housing chassis 102. The connector arrangement 274 may be coupled to an alarm, pulse oximetry port, and/or other suitable accessories. The electronics boards 272 can also be in electrical communication with an electrical connector 276 that can also be provided in the rear wall 122 of the upper housing chassis 102 to provide mains or battery power to the components of the device.

[00480] As mentioned above, operation sensors, such as flow, temperature, humidity, and/or pressure sensors can be placed in various locations in the respiratory device, the inspiratory conduit 16, and/or cannula 17. The electronics boards 272 can be in electrical communication with those sensors. Output from the sensors can be received by the controller 13, to assist the controller 13 to operate the respiratory system 10 in a manner that provides optimal therapy, including meeting inspiratory demand when the system is a high flow therapy system.

[00481] As outlined above, the electronics boards 272 and other electrical and electronic components can be pneumatically isolated from the gases flow path to improve safety. The sealing also prevents water ingress.

[00482] Figure 17 shows additional details of an alternative configuration of the breathing assistance apparatus of Figures 14-16. The breathing assistance apparatus may have any one or more features described for the apparatus of Figures 14-16.

[00483] The breathing assistance apparatus 10 may have any one or more of the features and/or functionality of the breathing assistance apparatus described and shown in WO2016/207838A9 and US patents application publication no. 2018/0185606 or US patent application nos. 62/755,936, 62/890,866, 62/925,971, and PCT/IB2019/059463 (published as WO 2020/095186). The contents of those specifications are incorporated herein in their entirety by way of reference.

[00484] Figures 17 to 19 show details of the removable elbow 171 that embodies the humidified gas inlet port 340 and the gasflow outlet port 21. Although this section describes the features of the humidified gas inlet port 340 including a seal 173, the features of the gas outlet port 322 of the housing and its interaction with the gas inlet port 306 of the humidification chamber will be the same.

[00485] The humidified gas inlet port 340 comprises a generally horizontally oriented extended portion that is configured to insert within the gas outlet port 308 of the humidification chamber. The terminal end 340a of the port has a rounded edge to aid in aligning the gas outlet port 322 with the humidified gas inlet port 340. Additionally, the terminal end 340a is slightly smaller in diameter than the gas outlet port 308.

[00486] At least one recessed portion is provided on the port 340. This recessed portion allows a seal 173 to be attached to the port.

[00487] The humidified gas inlet port 340 may comprise a plurality of seals or sealing elements located in the recess. The plurality of seals 175 may be a pair of wiper seals, L-seals, X-rings, or O-rings. The wiper seals may have a T-shaped cross-section. In some configurations, the gas inlet port 163 may comprise three or more seals or sealing elements. A similar seal arrangement can also be on the outlet port 322 of the base unit 50. The wiper seals, i.e. double seals, prevent or reduce breathing gas leak and/or condensate from moving towards the electronics in the removable elbow 171 and the electrical connector 178 (described below) of the elbow. Similarly, the seals reduce the chance of, and preferably prevent, liquid, i.e. condensate, from moving and dripping back into the gas outlet port 322 of the base unit 50 to prevent water ingress into the electronics chamber of the base unit.

[00488] The seal 173 may be made from silicone rubber. In an alternative configuration, the seal 173 could be made from any suitable elastomer, such as polyurethane. Alternatively, the seal 173 may be made from thermoplastic elastomer(s) and/or thermoplastic vulcanisate(s), particularly if the seal will be overmoulded onto the removable elbow.

[00489] The base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus 10 comprises a shroud 190 that cooperates with the housing 100 and the removable elbow 171. Figure 18 shows the removable elbow 171 connected to the shroud 190. As shown in Figure 17 for example, the shroud 190 serves to create a uniform upper surface of the housing 100 of the apparatus 10, with the patient outlet port 21 of the removable elbow 171 protruding upwardly through the shroud 190. The shroud 190 is configured such that it is not removable from the housing 100 in normal use of the apparatus 10.

[00490] As shown in Figure 18, the shroud 190 comprise a body 191 having a substantially flat horizontal upper surface 193, two contoured shoulders 195 having a substantially sinuous configuration that extend downwardly and outwardly from opposite sides of the upper surface 193, and two substantially vertical downwardly extending outer side walls 197. A recess 199 extends rearwardly into the upper surface 193 from a forward edge 193a of the upper surface 193. The recess 199 is sized and configured to receive part of the removable elbow 171, to provide an unobstructed path for the removable elbow 171 to be connected to the housing 100 of the base unit 50 of the apparatus 10.

[00491] Similarly, the removable elbow 171 has a flat horizontal tab 172 extending from the elbow that has a shape that is complementary to the shape of the recess 199 in the shroud, such that when the removable elbow 171 is assembled with the apparatus 10, the flat horizontal tab 172 is received in the recess 199 to create a uniform surface. This tab 172 can additionally provide an upper surface for the conduit 16 to contact when connecting the conduit 16 to the patient outlet port 21 of the elbow.

[00492] As shown in Figure 19, the flat horizontal tab 172 can have a thinned portion 172a adjacent the terminal forward end portion 172b, located between the patient outlet port 30 of the elbow and the terminal forward end portion 172b of the tab. This allows the terminal forward end portion 172b to flex vertically relative to the rest of the elbow 171.

[00493] The flat horizontal tab 172 also has engagement features comprising two protrusions 174 extending outwardly from opposite sides of the terminal forward end portion 172b of the tab. The protrusions 174 are configured to interact with engagement features comprising complementary engagement recesses (not shown) extending outwardly from either side wall 199a of the recess 199 of the shroud of the housing, on the underside of the shroud. The removable elbow 171 is configured to connect to the housing by moving the removable elbow in a first direction relative to the housing (rearwards towards the housing). The removable elbow 171 is configured to disconnect from the housing by moving the removable elbow 171 in a second direction (forwards relative to the housing) that is opposite to the first direction. Due to the interaction of the engagement features, the removable elbow 171 is configured to inhibit movement of the removable elbow 171 in the second direction in the absence of actuating part of the removable elbow, e.g. the terminal forward end portion 172b, relative to another part of the removable elbow to flex the tab. That inhibits removal of the removable elbow 171 from the shroud 190 of the housing 100.

[00494] In order to remove the elbow 171 from the housing 100, the user would typically first press downwards on the upper surface of the terminal forward end portion 172b of the tab 172, in order to actuate that part of the tab 172 by flexing the tab and disengage the protrusions 174 from the engagement recesses. Only once the tab has been flexed can a user then pull the elbow 171 out from the housing 100. One advantage of this is that it helps prevent the elbow 171 from coming loose when the humidification chamber 300 is being removed from the apparatus by pulling the humidification chamber 300 out of the recess 108.

[00495] Temperature sensor(s) such as thermistor(s) may be provided in the removable elbow 171. The thermistors may be located in the rear vertical wall of the upstanding portion of the elbow, close to the curved transition region between the vertical and horizontal elbow portions. At this location, the thermistors are relatively shielded from the heat produced by the heater plate 140, allowing for more accurate estimations of the temperature of gases flowing through the removable elbow 171 to be made.

[00496] The elbow 171 has electrical connectors positioned in an upstanding chimney 179a, the connectors configured to provide power from a main power board of the apparatus 10 to the heater wires 16a in the conduit 16.

[00497] As mentioned above, the shroud 190 is designed to not be removed during regular use. The shroud has features that allow it to be clipped onto a screen carrier 211, which in turn is fastened to the upper chassis 102 to become part of the housing 100. The screen carrier 211 can connect to and support a display 212. In alternative configurations, the screen carrier 211 may not be provided, and the shroud 190 may clip directly to part of the housing 100, such as an upper surface or upper chassis 102 of the housing.

[00498] The shroud 190 is configured to attach to the screen carrier 211 of the housing 100 via two movements; an initial movement of the shroud in a first direction followed by a subsequent movement of the shroud in a second direction that is offset from the first direction. In one configuration, the second direction is transverse to the first direction. In the form shown, the shroud 190 is configured to initially be moved in a first downward direction, followed by a movement in a second rearward direction, relative to the screen carrier 211 and thereby the housing 100. In the form shown, the downward direction DD is vertical and the rearward direction RD is horizontal.

[00499] The shroud 190 is configured so that the shroud cannot be detached from the screen carrier 211 of the housing solely by pulling the removable elbow 171 in the second forwards direction relative to the housing 100.

[00500] Each side 197 of the shroud 190 is shaped to be complementary to the shape of the screen carrier 211. The sides of the screen carrier 211 of the housing 100 have two forwardly directed horizontal protrusions 213 (one per side wall) that engage with complementary rearwardly open recesses 194 in rear walls on each side of the shroud 190 as the shroud is moved in the rearward direction relative to the housing (see Figure 20). Once the shroud 190 is connected to the screen carrier 211, the horizontal protrusions 213 being received in the recesses 194 prevent vertical movement of the shroud 190.

[00501] Similarly, the screen carrier 211 of the housing 100 has an upstanding vertical protrusion 215 on each side that engages with a complementary downwardly open recess 196 in the bottom of each side wall 197 of the shroud as the shroud is moved in the downward direction relative to the housing. Unlike the horizontal protrusions, the vertical protrusion 215 is narrower than the complementary recess 196 in the shroud. This allows for a small amount of horizontal movement in the rearward direction as shown in Figures 42 to 45. The vertical protrusion 215 and recess 196 aid in aligning the shroud 190 with the screen carrier 211 during assembly.

[00502] The shroud 190 is first placed above the screen carrier 211 and moved in the downward direction. The shroud is then slid horizontally in the rearward direction such that the horizontal protrusions 213 engage with the complementary recesses 194 in the shroud.

[00503] The shroud 190 and screen carrier 211 may have a second set of forwardly extending horizontal protrusions and rearwardly open recesses toward a forward end of the screen carrier 211 and shroud 190, to further inhibit vertical movement of the shroud 190 relative to the screen carrier 211.

[00504] The shroud 190 and screen carrier 211 of the housing 100 additionally have features to inhibit horizontal movement of the shroud relative to the screen carrier when they are fully engaged, to therefore inhibit removal of the shroud from the housing. The shroud may have one or more downwardly extending engagement protrusions (not shown) that extend downwards from the back of the lower surface of the shroud 190. The engagement protrusions are configured to engage with complementary upwardly extending engagement protrusion(s) 217 extending from an upper surface of the screen carrier 211.

[00505] The shroud can still be removed by moving the shroud 190 forwards in direction opposite to the rearward direction RD, if a large enough force is applied. However, this would only be done by a technician if some form of maintenance were being performed on the apparatus. The features above are designed such that the shroud 190 would not be removed during normal use (even accidentally).

[00506] It can be seen from Figure 20 that the engagement features on the shroud 190 and screen carrier 211 are such that the upper surface of the screen carrier can be configured so that there are no, or a minimal number of, exposed fasteners (such as screws) on the underside of the shroud and the upper surface of the screen carrier, meaning that the shroud and upper surface of the screen carrier are easy to clean.

[00507] The removable elbow 171 is removable from the housing 100 when the shroud 100 is attached to the housing.

[00508] Referring to Figure 19, the removable elbow 171 also includes a printed circuit board (PCB) electrical connector 178 for electrically connecting to the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus 10 to form an electrical connection with an electrical component in the main housing 100 of the base unit. The electrical connection provides an electrical link between the base unit 50 of the apparatus 10 and the temperature sensors embedded in the elbow, as well as between the base unit 50 of the apparatus 10 and the conduit 16 (when the conduit has one or more sensors and/or a heating element), via an electrical interconnecting assembly in the main housing of the base unit. The PCB electrical connector 178 electrically connects to the electrical interconnecting assembly when the removable elbow 171 is connected to the housing 100.

[00509] The PCB electrical connector 178 facilitates electrical communication of signals from the sensor in or along the conduit and/or patient interface (e.g. a patient end temperature sensor) to the controller via the main circuit board 272. The connector 178 also facilitates electrical communication of the heater wires by the controller if present in the conduit. Similarly, other sensors within the breathing assistance apparatus e.g. temperature and/or flow sensors in the elbow, are in electrical communication with the controller via the PCB electrical connector 178 and main circuit board 272. [00510] The breathing assistance apparatus may have a controller that receives sensor readings, processes sensor readings, and/or performs other various functions e.g. calculating respiratory rate or determining oxygen concentration, controlling components of the breathing assistance apparatus, e.g. controlling operation of a blower or heater plate of the humidifier or heater wire in the conduit.

[00511] The breathing assistance apparatus may comprise an additional controller that is configured to provide control signals to components based on control signals from a main controller of the breathing assistance apparatus. For example, the components may comprise a motor of the blower, the display or portable display, and/or one or more other components.

[00512] In the configuration shown, the PCB electrical connector 178 is partly housed in a housing 178a that is integrally formed with the elbow. The PCB electrical connector projects rearwardly from the housing 178a to insert into an electrical connector on the base unit 50 of the apparatus 10 in a horizontal direction (i.e. the same rearward insertion direction in which the humidification chamber 300 connects to the housing 100 of the base unit 50 and the same rearward direction RD in which the shroud 190 connects to the screen carrier 211). The electrical connector may be part of, or in electrical communication with, an interconnect circuit board 271 of the base unit 50, which is described below.

Portable display unit

[00513] A portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be provided for use with, or in combination with, any of the breathing assistance apparatuses described herein.

[00514] The specification discloses several configurations of a portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. Any one or more of the described features and functionality can be used in various combinations in any one more of the portable display units.

[00515] Figures 21 to 27 show a first configuration of the portable display unit 3000. The portable display unit 3000 comprises a display unit housing 3001, a screen 3051, and a tethering component (TCI, TC2, and/or TC3) for tethering the portable display unit 3000 with a base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00516] The screen 3051 may be a touch screen to enable the user to interact with the screen to control one or more functions of the breathing assistance apparatus in addition to the screen 3051 displaying information. [00517] The screen 3051 may be a capacitive touch screen. Alternatively, the screen 3051 may be a resistive touch screen. Resistive touch screen technology may provide improved performance in environments where the screen may be exposed to liquids, which could cause phantom touches on capacitive screens.

[00518] Alternatively, the screen may not be a touch screen and may only be used for display purposes.

[00519] In addition to, or alternatively to, a touch screen, the portable display unit 3000 could comprise user input component(s) such as button(s) or dial(s). Examples are described below.

[00520] The display unit housing 3001 comprises a front wall 3003, a rear wall 3005, opposed side walls 3007, and a base 3009.

[00521] Curved surfaces 3011 provide smooth intersections between the front, side, and front and rear walls.

[00522] An upper surface 3013 of the display unit housing 3001 forms a screen support for receipt of the screen 3051. A portion of the screen support is recessed so the screen 3051 can sit flush with the uppermost surface 3013a of the housing. In some configurations, the screen support may be configured so that the screen 3051 is spaced rearwardly from the uppermost surface 3013a of the housing, to provide protection for the screen.

[00523] The interior of the display unit housing 3001 may be substantially hollow to provide space for housing or routing electrical and/or electronic components.

[00524] In the form shown the display unit housing 3001 has a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. It will be appreciated that the display unit housing 3001 could have any other suitable shape such as square, polygonal, elliptical, or round for example.

[00525] The tethering component TCI, TC2 may be a component that is configured for physically tethering the portable display unit 3000 with the base unit of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00526] By physically tethering the portable display unit 3000 with the breathing assistance apparatus, the portable display unit 3000 may be moved relative to the breathing assistance apparatus but only within a limited distance. That may be of benefit to minimise the likelihood of the portable display unit 3000 being misplaced, particularly in an environment where multiple breathing assistance apparatuses and multiple display units are used.

[00527] The tethering component may comprise a cable 3061 (see, for example, Figure 30). The cable may be any suitable type of elongate flexible member including, but not limited to, a cord, a metal, polymeric, or combination cable, a rope, or a string.

[00528] The cable may be resilient and can be stretched and returned to its original unloaded length. That provides flexibility, the ability to move the portable display unit 3000 to a desired use location, and reduces load transfer on the portable display unit due to movement of the base unit 50.

[00529] The cable may be integrally formed with or coupled to the portable display unit. The cable may be separable from the portable display unit 3000 or may be permanently affixed to the portable display unit 3000.

[00530] This connection may be captive and designed only to be removed during servicing of the apparatus. For example, there may be a retaining feature that is removable by a technician by screws or otherwise, but the cable is not removable during normal use.

[00531] If the cable is separable from, or provided separately from, the portable display unit 3000, the tethering component TCI, TC2 may comprise a connector for connecting the cable 3061 to the portable display unit 3000.

[00532] Similarly, if the cable is separable from, or provided separately from, the base unit 50, the base unit 50 may have a connector for connecting the cable 3061 to the base unit.

[00533] In the configuration shown, the housing 3001 of the portable display unit 3000 comprises a first tethering component TCI comprising a first connector port for connecting to a cable (e.g., cable 3061 of Figure 30). The housing 3001 of the portable display unit 3000 may comprise an optional second tethering component TC2 comprising a second connector port for connecting to an optional second cable (not shown).

[00534] In the configuration shown, the first tethering component TCI is provided in the rear wall 3005 of the housing 3001. By providing the first tethering component TCI in the rear wall 3005, the cable 3061 is unlikely to interfere with the user's interaction with the screen 3051 or other components of the breathing assistance apparatus. However, the tethering component(s) TCI, TC2 can be provided in any suitable surface(s) of the housing 3001.

[00535] The cable 3061 may be resiliently flexible and/or may be retractable into the display unit housing 3001 or the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus. That enables the cable 3061 to lengthen as required during movement and positing of the portable display unit 3000, but to return substantially to an initial length when force is removed from the cable 3061.

[00536] In one configuration, the cable 3061 comprises a coiled arrangement (see, for example, cable 3061 of Figure 30) that lengthens upon application of a tensile force. In another configuration, the cable 3061 comprises a length of elastomeric material that lengthens upon application of a tensile force.

[00537] Additionally or alternatively, the display unit housing 3001 or the base unit 50 may contain a retraction mechanism for retracting the cable 3061 when tensile force is removed. For example, the retracting mechanism may comprise a biased reel that the cable 3061 is wound around. The biased reel may enable a user to pull the cable 3061 off the reel to move the portable display unit 3000, and may lock the position of the reel. The user could then pull the cable to release the lock, which will cause the biased reel to retract the cable 3061 as the user moves the portable display unit 3000 to a position closer to the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00538] In some exemplary configurations, the cable length may be between about 0.5m to 3m, optionally between about 1.5m and about 2.5m. The cable length may be up to about 2m. The cable length may be between about 1.5m and about 2m.

[00539] In one example, the length of the cable may be the same length or longer than the inspiratory conduit. In some configurations, the cable is longer than the inspiratory conduit. In some configurations, the cable is as long as or longer than the inspiratory conduit and the interface conduit. As the patient might be positioned at a distance from the base unit up to the total length of the inspiratory conduit and the interface conduit, the display unit tethering cable is preferably equal to or greater than the total length of the conduits. This allows the display unit to be moved freely. For example, the display unit can be disconnected from the base unit and positioned at a location that the display unit is easy to view — for example near the patient. This allows the clinician to get information from the display unit while still keeping the base unit away from the patient. [00540] The cable 3061 may be able to be disconnected from the portable display unit 3000 or from the base unit 50.

[00541] The cable 3061 may solely provide a physical tether between the portable display unit 3000 and the base unit of the breathing assistance apparatus. Alternatively, the cable may provide electrical and/or electronic communication between the portable display unit and the base unit.

[00542] The cable may communicate power to the portable display unit from the base unit and/or may communicate data between the portable display unit and the base unit, both when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit and when the portable display unit is separated from the base unit. Therefore, the cable may comprise at least one wire for communicating power to the portable display unit from the base unit and/or for communicating data between the portable display unit and the base unit.

[00543] When the cable communicates power and/or data and/or control signals, the length of the cable may be selected to minimise latency. In one exemplary configuration, the cable may have a similar length to the inspiratory conduit of the breathing circuit. For example, a length of about 1.5m. This may be useful for assisting with enabling various therapy modes promptly and minimising latency.

[00544] The tethering component connector(s) TCI, TC2 on the portable display unit 3000 may comprise an electrical connector that is in communication with component(s) of the portable display unit to communicate power and/or data between the base unit and the portable display unit. The cable 3061 may communicate both data and/or power. Alternatively, the cable may communicate one of data or power, and another cable coupled to TC2 may communicate the other one of data or power.

[00545] One or both ends of the cable 3061 may comprise an electrical connector for connecting the wire(s) of the cable to respective electrical ports on the base unit 50 and portable display unit 3000.

[00546] In an alternative configuration in which the cable 3061 solely provides a physical tether between the portable display unit 3000 and the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus, a separate cable may provide power and/or data communication between the base unit and the portable display unit 3000.

[00547] The cable 3061 can be disconnected from the base unit 50 to allow the portable display unit 3000 to be completely detached from the base unit 50. [00548] In a further alternative configuration, the cable 3061 may be co-axial with the inspiratory conduit. In a further alternative configuration, the cable may be wrapped around the inspiratory conduit in order to stow the cable when the portable display unit 3000 is disconnected. The cable being wrapped around the inspiratory conduit can tidily stow the cable and reduce the chances of free cables.

[00549] Additionally or alternatively to the tethering components TCI, TC2, the tethering component TC3 (see, for example, Figure 27) may comprise a component of a wireless communication interface for communicating control signals and/or other data between the portable display unit 3000 and the base unit.

[00550] The wireless component may comprise a wireless data transmitter and/or receiver or a transceiver to communicate with a wireless data transmitter and/or receiver of the breathing assistance apparatus to communicate data between the base unit and the portable display unit 3000.

[00551] The wireless communication may be of any suitable configuration such as, but not limited to, Wi-Fi, near field communication (NFC), or Bluetooth.

[00552] The portable display unit 3000 may use a combination of physical and wireless tethering with the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus. For example, the portable display unit 3000 may be physically tethered by the cable 3061 and optionally may be powered by the cable 3061, but may be wirelessly tethered with the base unit 50 for data communication. In another alternative, there may be no physical tether between the portable display unit 3000 and the base unit 50, but the portable display unit 3000 may be wirelessly tethered with the base unit 50. In that configuration, the portable display unit 3000 may be battery powered. The battery may be rechargeable, and may be powered by a removable cable, by electrically coupling the portable display unit with the base unit, or by inductive charging when the portable display unit is connected to, or brought into contact with, the base unit 50.

[00553] The portable display unit 3000 may couple to a docking port on the base unit 50 to provide an electrical connection between the portable display unit 3000 and base unit 50 to charge the battery of the portable display unit 3000.

[00554] In some configurations, the portable display unit 3000 may comprise a battery to power the portable display unit. The breathing assistance apparatus may comprise a wireless power transfer system integrated into the breathing assistance apparatus. The breathing assistance apparatus may comprise an inductive power transfer system that can be used to charge the battery of the portable display unit. For example, the base unit may comprise a charging coil and the portable display unit comprises a receiving coil. The charging coil can inductively couple to the receiving coil and induce current in the receiving coil. The battery is electrically connected to the receiving coil and can be charged by the induced current. The charging coil is supplied current by an internal power source under the control of the controller of the base unit.

[00555] The battery of the portable display unit 3000 may function as a backup power source if the cable 3061 is disconnected or malfunctions, or may in some embodiments (such as when the portable display unit 3000 has wireless functionality to the base unit 50 or other medical devices) be the main power source for the portable display unit 3000.

[00556] The battery may be rechargeable. In some configurations, the battery may be charged via a charging port. The charging port may align with the tethering connector TCI, TC2 of the portable display unit 3000.

[00557] The portable display unit 3000 may be a stand-alone unit that remains physically separate from the base unit 50 (other than a physical tether, if any). Alternatively, the portable display unit 3000 may be physically connectable to the base unit 50. The portable display unit 3000 may be removable or separable from the base unit 50 to enable the portable display unit 3000 to be positioned in a desired remote location for use.

[00558] When the portable display unit 3000 is removably connectable to the base unit 50, the portable display unit 3000 comprises at least one connection feature 3071 for removably connecting the portable display unit 3000 to the base unit 50, and optionally to a different support component. As non-limiting examples, a different support component may be or may include a medical pole, incubator, or other component such as those typically used in a medical setting.

[00559] The at least one connection feature 3071 may be arranged to interact with complementary connection feature(s) on the base unit 50 and/or on the different support component.

[00560] The at least one connection feature 3071 may comprise one or more suitable features to enable removable connection of the portable display unit 3000 with the base unit 50 and/or the different support component. Exemplary suitable connection features include, but are not limited to, adhesives, hook and loop fasteners, fasteners, threaded connections, clips and clamps, and/or complementary protrusions and/or recesses. An alternative connection feature comprises a latch mechanism. For example, the portable display unit 3000 may comprise a pair of latches that can be used to couple to corresponding receiving features on the base unit 50 and/or on the different support component.

[00561] An additional or alternative connection feature 3071 may comprise magnet(s) and may predominantly use magnetic force for the connection or may at least use magnetic force to bias the connection.

[00562] For example, one of the portable display unit 3000 and the base unit 50/different support component may comprise one or more magnets, and the other of the portable display unit 3000 and the base unit 50/different support component may comprise one or more magnets or magnetisable material. The magnet(s) on the portable display unit 3000 or base unit 50/different support component may cooperate with the magnet(s) or magnetisable material on the other of the portable display unit 3000 and base unit 50/different support component.

[00563] The connection feature(s) 3071 may provide haptic or audible feedback for connection.

[00564] The connection feature 3071 on the portable display unit 3000 may comprise a first component of a sliding connector. The first component may be engageable with a second component of the sliding connector on the base unit 50 or on a different support component.

[00565] The first component and second component may be engageable with each other in a sliding action of one component relative to the other. For example, the first component may be engageable with the second component in a sliding action in a first direction of one component relative to the other.

[00566] Once engaged, the first component and second component may not be disengageable by attempted movement of the first component relative to the second component in a direction transverse to the first direction. The first component may only be disengageable from the second component by moving the first component relative to the second component in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction.

[00567] One of the first component and the second component may comprise a male component, and the other of the first component and the second component may comprise a complementary female component to receive the male component. For example, the male component may be provided on the portable display unit 3000 and the female component may be provided on the base unit 50 or on the different support component. Alternatively, the female component may be provided on the portable display unit 3000 and the male component may be provided on the base unit 50 or on the different support component.

[00568] In some configurations, the male component may comprise a tongue and the female component may comprise a receiver or cradle for the tongue.

[00569] Figures 25 and 26 show an exemplary connection feature 3071 on the base 3009 of the display unit housing 3001 for engaging with a complementary connection feature 2071 on the base unit (Figure 29). The same or a similar complementary connection feature 2071 could be used on the different support component.

[00570] In the configuration shown, the complementary connection feature 2071 is provided on an upper angled surface 211a of the screen carrier 211 of the base unit.

[00571] The complementary connection feature 2071 comprises a female component.

[00572] In the configuration shown, the complementary connection feature 2071 comprises a connection housing 2073 which acts as a receiver for the connection feature 3071.

[00573] The connection housing comprises a forward wall 2075, two side walls 2077, and two inwardly directed flanges 2079. The flanges 2079 are spaced apart to provide a relatively narrow spacing 2081 between the flanges. An end of the housing opposite the forward wall 2075 defines a relatively wide opening 2083 that is wider than the spacing 2081.

[00574] The connection feature 3071 comprises a male component. In the form shown, the male component comprises a tongue but could alternatively have different configurations.

[00575] The tongue comprises a relatively narrow elongate body member 3073 that extends downwardly from the base 3009 of the display unit housing 3001. The body member 3073 has a dimension that is slightly narrower than the spacing 2081. Flanges 3075 project outwardly from either side of the bottom of the body member 3073, and have a dimension that is slightly narrower than the opening 2083. [00576] The connection feature 3071 may comprise a single elongate member, or may comprise a plurality of elongate members. In the configuration shown, the connection feature 3071 comprises an elongate member that provides a rear portion of features 3073, 3075, and a spaced part separate forward member that provides a forward portion 3073a, 3075a of those members.

[00577] The portable display unit 3000 connects to, and separates from, the housing of the base unit 50 by a sliding action of the portable display unit relative to the base unit. In the configuration shown, the flanges 3075, 3075a are inserted into the connection housing under the flanges 2079 and slid forwardly. Because the upper surface 211a of the screen carrier is angled, gravity will assist with retaining the portable display unit 3000 in connection with the base unit 50. To separate the portable display unit 3000 from the base unit, the portable display unit is slid rearward ly relative to the screen carrier 211 until the flanges 3075 clear the flanges 2079.

[00578] Rather than being provided on the base 3009 of the portable display unit 3000 and the upper surface 211a of the screen carrier 211, the connection features 3071, 2071 could be provided elsewhere on the portable display unit 3000 and/or base unit 50, with the connection and removal directions varying accordingly.

[00579] The portable display unit 3000 comprises a circuit board with appropriate electrical and electronic components. Although not shown in this configuration, a configuration of the portable display unit 4000 with the circuit board 4004 is shown in Figures 52 and 54.

[00580] The circuit board may comprise a printed circuit board (PCB).

[00581] The circuit board of the portable display unit 3000 comprises a controller such as a microcontroller or microprocessor that controls the operations of the display unit, processes signals received from the base unit 50 (e.g., from the base unit microcontroller or microprocessor, and/or from one or more sensors located in the base unit 50), and generate control signals, for example, in response to user input via the screen 3051 or other user input component(s) such as button(s) or dial(s). The circuit board/controller may receive data relating to respiratory parameters or usage data from the base unit 50. The circuit board/controller may send control signals to the base unit 50. The portable display unit 3000 may further comprise a communication unit e.g., comprising a communication chip or a communication module (e.g., comprising a communication microcontroller and an antenna) that provides wireless communication capabilities for the portable display unit 3000. Further the base unit 50 also comprises a communication unit that allows the base unit to wirelessly communicate with the portable display unit 3000.

[00582] The portable display unit 3000 comprises a communication interface for communicating data and/or control signals between the base unit and the portable display unit, both when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit and when the portable display unit is separated from the base unit. The communication interface may be provided by any of the options outlined above, e.g., the cable 3061, a different wire, and/or wireless communication.

[00583] The circuit board may be in electrical and/or electronic communication with the screen 3051, a backlight, and one or more user input components such as button(s) or dial(s). The circuit board may send power and data signals to and/or from the screen 3051, backlight, and user input components(s).

[00584] The portable display unit 3000 may optionally comprise at least one support feature for supporting the portable display unit on a support surface (that is different from the base unit 50).

[00585] The support feature(s) may be configured to support the portable display unit 3000 on one support surface, or may be configured to support the portable display unit 3000 on a plurality of different support surfaces.

[00586] The support feature(s) may be fixed relative to the housing 3001 or may be adjustable relative to the housing 3001 (e.g. one or more pivoting legs or supports).

[00587] In the configuration shown, the portable display unit 3000 comprises a support feature 3081 (see, for example, Figures 21, 24 and 27) for supporting the portable display unit on a plurality of different support surfaces.

[00588] The support feature 3081 is arranged to support the portable display unit 3000 on a substantially horizontal support surface or on a medical pole.

[00589] In the configuration shown, the support feature comprises a projecting wall 3082 that provides a base edge 3083 for resting on a substantially horizontal support surface. The projecting wall 3082 extends downwardly from each side wall 3007 of the display unit housing, beyond the base 3009 of the base unit housing.

[00590] The base edge 3083 is at an acute angle relative to the upper surface 3013 of the housing, so that the screen is inclined toward a user when the base edge 3083 is on the support surface. [00591] Each projecting wall 3082 optionally comprises an angled slot 3085 that extends upwardly and rearwardly from the base edge 3083 to form a spacing between forward and rearward portions of the base edge. The angled slot 3085 terminates at or adjacent the base 3009 of the housing 3001.

[00592] The slot(s) 3085 act as hanging hook(s) and enable(s) the portable display unit 3000 to be supported on a horizontally extending stud or arm extending outwardly from a medical pole for example, with the stud or arm extending through the angled slot(s) 3085.

[00593] Because the angled slots 3085 are aligned with the connection feature 3071, the connection feature 3071 may have a corresponding angled slot 3085' between the forward 3073a, 3075a and rearward 3073, 3075 portions of the connection feature 3071 (see Figure 26). That may be provided in addition to, or instead of, the projecting walls 3082 and angled slots 3085. The support feature comprising the angled slot 3085' is provided by the same structural element as the connection feature 3071. The angled slot 3085' and the connection feature 3071 may be injection moulded as part of the same polymeric component for example.

[00594] The projecting walls 3083 provide features that enable a user to grip the unit 3000 and/or tilt the unit 3000.

[00595] As shown schematically in Figure 31, in some configurations an angular orientation a of the screen 3051 can be adjusted relative to the display unit housing 3001. Alternatively, in some configurations an angular orientation of the display unit housing 3001 can be adjusted relative to the at least one connection feature 3071 and/or the at least one support feature 3081.

[00596] In some configurations, the screen 3051 may be rotatable around an axis that extends orthogonally through the screen 3051. The rotation may be of the screen 3051 relative to the display unit housing 3001. Alternatively, the rotation may be provided by the display unit housing 3001 being rotatable relative to the at least one connection feature 3071 and/or the at least one support feature 3081. Alternatively, the rotation may be provided between the at least one connection feature 3071 and the complementary connection feature 2071.

[00597] Accordingly, the screen 3051 may be angularly adjusted and/or rotated to an optimal viewing angle relative to the base unit 50 and/or a different support component and/or support surface. [00598] A pivot structure may be provided between the screen 3551 and the display unit housing 3001, or between the display unit housing 3001 and the at least one connection feature 3071 and/or the at least one support feature 3081.

[00599] The pivot structure may comprise a frictional arrangement, an indexing arrangement, a locking pin arrangement, or a ratchet arrangement to enable the screen 3551 or display unit housing 3001 to be locked in a plurality of different angular positions.

[00600] The various configurations will enable an angular orientation of the screen 3551 to be adjusted to an optimal angle relative to the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus, relative to a different support component, or relative to a support surface that the portable display unit is being supported by.

[00601] By way of example, the angle of the screen may be between about 0 and about 90 degrees relative to a horizontal plane. In some configurations, the angle is between about 10 degrees and about 75 degrees. In some configurations, the angle may be between about 15 degrees and about 60 degrees.

[00602] In some configurations, the screen may be at an angle of between about 10 degrees and about 20 degrees relative to a horizontal plane, and optionally about 15 degrees relative to a horizontal plane, when the portable display unit is engaged to the base unit 50.

[00603] Figures 34-39 show an alternative portable display unit 3500 for use with any of the breathing assistance apparatuses described herein. Unless described differently below, the features, functioning, and options are the same as for portable display unit 3000, and like reference numerals indicate like parts with the addition of 500.

[00604] As outlined above, any one or more described features and functionality can be used in various combinations in any one more of the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00605] In this configuration, the screen 3551 is further recessed from the upper surface 3513 of the display unit housing 3501. That is, the display unit housing 3501 projects upwardly more than the screen 3551. This provides a level of drop or impact protection for the screen - if the portable display unit 3500 is dropped or experiences an impact, there is unlikely to be a direct impact on the screen 3551. [00606] The corners of the display unit housing 3501 between the walls 3503, 3507, 3509 are covered by an impact absorbent and relatively soft material 3511. The portions of impact absorbent material 3511 may extend partly over the upper surface 3513 and base 3509. Covering the corners of the display unit housing 3501 with impact absorbent material 3511 reduces the likelihood of damage to the housing 3501 if the portable display unit 3500 is dropped or experiences an impact. The material 3511 may be integrally formed with the display unit housing 3501 or may be formed separately from, and then attached to, the display unit housing 3501. The material 3511 may be removable from the display unit housing 3501. The material 3511 may be replaceable.

[00607] Material selection may involve semi-rigid material which is tough enough to withstand impact. That is, the display unit housing 3501 or at least the corner sections of the display unit housing 3501 may comprise a semi-rigid material which is tough enough to withstand impact (e.g., if dropped from a height). In one configuration, the entire display unit housing 3501 may include or may be made of the semi-rigid material. This may be a singular piece with increased thickness at the corners 3511 of the portable display unit 3500. The material will advantageously be thin enough, and transparent, to enable actuation/use of the touchscreen.

[00608] Exemplary materials can include silicone or polyurethane. Other foam materials may be used to provide impact absorption.

[00609] In the configuration shown, the tethering component TCI comprises a port that projects from the housing 3501 for connection to the cable 3061.

[00610] The connection feature 3571 and the support feature 3581 are provided by the same structural element.

[00611] The connection feature 3571 is substantially the same as the connection feature 3071; however, rather than being provided on the base 3059 of the housing 3501, it is provided on the same structural element that provides the support feature 3581.

[00612] The structural element that provides the support feature 3581 comprises a component that is pivotably mounted to the housing 3051 by pivot structure 3582.

[00613] In the form shown in Figures 39 and 42, the structural element, in the form of the support feature 3581, comprises a generally L-shaped member having a relatively large body 3581a and a relatively small extension 3581b. The base 3509 of the housing 3501 comprises a recess 3509a to receive the relatively large body 3581a when the portable display unit 3500 is in the configuration shown in Figure 39 for connecting the portable display unit 3500 to the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00614] The complementary connection feature 2571 on the base unit (see, for example, Figure 41) is substantially the same as connection feature 2071, except that the connection feature 2571 is recessed rather than projecting upwardly beyond the upper surface 211a of the screen carrier 211.

[00615] When the portable display unit 3500 is separated from the breathing assistance apparatus or the base unit thereof, it can be supported on a substantially horizontal support surface on the bottom edge 3581b' of the extension 3581b and on forward feet 3509b of the housing 3501 (as shown in Figure 39).

[00616] When a user wants to hang the portable display unit 3500 on a support surface, they can pivot the structural element (e.g., support feature 3581) from the position shown in Figure 39 towards the position shown in Figure 42, to hang the portable display unit 3500 as shown in Figures 43 and 44 for example.

[00617] The structural element may be pivotable through any angle up to 90 degrees, but in some configurations may be pivotable through smaller angles, such as up to 80 degrees, up to 70 degrees, up to 60 degrees, up to 50 degrees, up to 40 degrees, or up to 30 degrees for example.

[00618] The pivot structure 3582 may comprise a frictional arrangement, an indexing arrangement, a locking pin arrangement, or a ratchet arrangement to enable the structural element to be locked in a plurality of different angular positions.

[00619] As shown in Figure 42, the relatively large body 3581a may comprise a rough surface 3581a' to assist with gripping on to a support surface when the portable display unit 3500 is hanging. The rough surface may comprise a plurality of protrusions, ribs, ridges, channels, bumps, or the like. In the form shown, the rough surface 3581a' comprises a plurality of transversely extending ribs.

[00620] The rough surface is provided on the opposite side of the relatively large body 3581a to the connection feature 3571 and is positioned in the recess 3509a when the structural element is in the position shown in Figure 39.

[00621] In some configurations, the screen 3551 may be at an angle of between about 20 degrees and about 60 degrees, optionally between about 25 degrees and about 45 degrees, optionally between about 25 degrees to about 35 degrees relative to a flat horizontal surface when the portable display unit has its support 3581 deployed and the portable display unit display is positioned on a flat surface e.g., a table top. In some examples, the screen may be at about 30 degrees or about 45 degrees in that scenario.

[00622] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be provided with handle feature(s) to improve ergonomics and the ability to be handled by a user. The handle feature(s) may comprise one or more recessed regions, shaped regions, or differing/multi-material regions. For example, the impact absorbent material 3511 regions may provide handle features, or may extend along sides of the housing 3501 to assist with gripping the portable display unit. By way of example, the impact absorbent material 3511 regions or subsections thereof may be textured, ridged, etc. to assist with gripping/increasing friction. Certain portions of the portable display unit may comprise features which enhance the grip of the screen module by a user.

[00623] The handle feature(s) may extend outwardly from the upper face of the display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001 in the vicinity of the screen 3051, 3551, 4051. For example, the handle feature may comprise a handle above the screen, a handle to one side of the screen, or a handle on either side of the screen. As such, the handle(s) may provide additional drop or impact protection for the screen 3051, 3551, 4051.

[00624] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be waterproof and shockproof, and may be capable of withstanding an impact after being dropped from a certain height. In some examples, the portable display unit may be capable of withstanding drops from around 2m or less which may occur owing to user error. Because the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 does not comprise or comprises very few moving parts, the ability to withstand a drop is largely dependent on the strength of materials for the housing.

[00625] Consideration of IPX3 to IPX6 protection may involve the use of internal seals and gaskets to prevent water ingression. In one form, water ingress may not be strictly controlled but a pathway for water to evaporate may be considered. Water ingress may happen due to a humid working environment.

[00626] In a further example, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be hermetically sealed to prevent water and oxygen ingress into the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 or through the corresponding portable display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001. [00627] Exemplary features to provide sealing of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 are described below for portable display unit 4000. The specification discloses several configurations of a portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. Any one or more of the described features and functionality can be used in various combinations in any one more of the portable display units.

[00628] In a further example, the portable display unit may be modular (e.g., one or more parts are disconnectable) to allow various parts to be removed for replacement. A modular display unit allows replacement of the screen or electrical components in the circuit boards used with the display unit.

[00629] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may have active or passive cooling to provide heat protection.

[00630] If the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 will be used in elevated temperature environments, the unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may comprise a heat sink, heat spreader, or heat dissipation element. The heat sink, heat spreader, or heat dissipation element may be located within the housing 3001, 3501, 4001 of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 or external to the housing 3001, 3501, 4001 and thermally connected to components within the housing 3001, 3501, 4001 that may tend to run at higher temperatures.

[00631] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may generate or trigger an alarm when a threshold temperature of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is exceeded. The threshold temperature may be with respect to the temperature of the ambient environment or the internal temperature of the portable display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001.

[00632] The alarm may be presented by or include activation of the portable display unit notification light 4150, 4150', the base unit notification light 240, speaker S, and/or via the screen 3051, 3551, 4051 described below.

[00633] The connector 3071, 3571, 4071 of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may function as a heat sink when engaged with a complementary connector 2071, 2071' on the base unit 50 or on a different support component such as a medical pole, incubator, or other component such as those typically used in a medical setting.

[00634] The connector 3071, 3571, 4071 and complementary connector 2071, 2071' may comprise material(s) with high heat transfer capability to transfer heat away from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 through the connector 3071, 3571, 4071 and complementary connector 2071, 2071'.

[00635] The material(s) will typically have a high heat capacity and thermal conductivity to absorb heat energy without shifting towards a very high temperature and transmit it to the environment for efficient cooling. Exemplary materials include aluminium, aluminium alloys, and copper for example.

[00636] The display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001 may comprise fins or similar structures to increase the surface area available for transferring heat to the environment.

[00637] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may comprise thermal pad(s) to assist with heat sinking or transferring heat from an interior of the portable display unit to an exterior heat sink that is in contact with ambient environment. The thermal pad(s) may provide electrical isolation properties. The thermal pad(s) may comprise silicone or graphite for example.

[00638] The display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001 may comprise cooling vent(s).

[00639] The display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001 may comprise an inner casing and an outer casing. The inner casing may be sealed to prevent oxygen and water ingress, but may comprise sections of conductive material. As a non-limiting example, the sections of conductive material may enable heat to be conducted away from the internal components of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. The outer casing may comprise cooling vent(s) to allow heat dissipation/air flow for convective cooling.

[00640] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may comprise active cooling features. In one example, the active cooling features comprise one or more fans.

[00641] The fan(s) can be driven by power from the portable display unit battery or via power from the base unit 50.

[00642] The fan(s) may be activated after a therapy session has ended, for example as part of a drying cycle. In a drying cycle, the blower of the base unit 50 is powered to a predetermined motor speed for a set time, the heater plate is run at a low power or may be switched off, and the heater wire in the breathing conduit is activated to a predetermined power e.g., full power. The drying cycle lasts for a predetermined period of time. [00643] Similarly, when a drying cycle or a drying mode is activated, a signal may be sent to activate the fan(s) in the portable display unit for a predetermined time, and the fan(s) may be driven at a predetermined motor speed.

[00644] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may comprise heat- reflective material(s) internally and/or externally of the portable display unit. This may help reflect internal and/or external heat.

[00645] A heat-reflective material(s) may form a radiant barrier to reflect heat radiation (radiant heat), preventing or minimising heat transfer from one side of the barrier to another due to a reflective, low emittance surface. The material(s) may comprise reflective tape or foil. The tape or foil may comprise aluminium tape or foil for example. The tape or foil may be coated for resistance to the elements and/or for abrasion resistance.

[00646] As described further herein, internal components of the portable display unit such as the circuit board 4004 may be surrounded by a material which has shock absorption properties. This material may also allow for waterproofing (e.g., by sealing the components) and heat dissipation (by way of its material properties).

[00647] When used for sealing, exemplary material may comprise silicone rubber or may comprise any suitable elastomer, such as polyurethane. Alternatively, exemplary material may comprise thermoplastic elastomer(s) and/or thermoplastic vulcanisate(s), particularly if the seal will be overmoulded onto the circuit board 4004.

[00648] When used for shock absorbing, exemplary material may comprise shock absorbing polymers, viscoelastic polymers, visco polymers or other polymers. Examples include rubber, neoprene, and silicone.

[00649] These materials dissipate impact energy by spreading it over a much larger surface and absorbing it at the same time. This transfers the energy from the impact directly into the material so that the internal components are not damaged.

[00650] Additionally or alternatively, a potting compound, a foam, or polystyrene could be used.

[00651] The display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001 may comprise one or more features which provide protection against electromagnetic radiation (such as radio frequency interference for example). This may comprise shielding on or in the display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001 to isolate internal components of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 from the surroundings. [00652] Exemplary materials comprise sheet metal, a metal screen, or metal foam. For example, the material(s) include copper, brass, nickel, silver, steel, tin, aluminium foil, copper foil.

[00653] When cable(s) 3061, 3561, 4061 are used, the cable(s) may comprise shielding to isolate internal wire(s) from the external environment.

[00654] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be used with, or provided in combined with, an external heat shield. The external heat shield may be configured to be positioned to cover at least part of the portable display unit.

[00655] The heat shield may comprise a heat-resistant material. The heat shield may comprise any of the materials outlined above for the heat- reflective material of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. The material may be transparent, e.g., optically transparent.

[00656] The heat shield may be mounted to the base unit 50 or to the different support component. In some configurations, the heat shield may be removably or movably mounted to the base unit 50 or to the different support component. For example, when the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is to be used on a medical pole or medical stand, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be connected to the medical pole or medical stand, and the heat shield may be movably mounted to the medical pole or medical stand to surround or otherwise cover the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00657] In some configurations, the heat shield and the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be mounted on a pivoting arm. The heat shield and the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may alternatively be mounted on respective pivoting arms.

[00658] The arms or other support components that the heat shield and/or portable display units may be used on may comprise multiple axis pivoting arms, allowing the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and/or the heat shield to be movably positioned by the clinician or other user.

[00659] The heat shield is able to be moved by a clinician or other user to surround or cover the portable display unit and protect it from external heat.

[00660] The heat shield may be configured to provide a pocket of air between the heat shield and portable display unit, the pocket of air assisting in insulating heat from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. [00661] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may comprise one or more sensors for ambient conditions — e.g., an ambient light sensor which is able to be used to adjust the brightness of the screen. The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may comprise a speaker. The speaker may be used for audible alerts.

[00662] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may comprise one or more user input components such as dials D, switches or buttons B for control of the breathing assistance apparatus. The dial(s) D, switch(es) or button(s) B may be separate from the touchscreen. As non-limiting examples, the dial(s) D, switch(es) or button(s) B may provide haptic feedback for the initiation of therapy modes and/or for adjustment of settings or parameters, etc. Further, the dial(s) D, switch(es), and/or button(s) B may provide means for making rapid, accurate adjustments to the operation of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and/or the breathing assistance apparatus. The dial(s) D, switch(es), and/or button(s) B may also be actuated from positions not directly in front of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 (e.g., from the side or at an acute angle relative to the front face of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000) — whereas the touchscreen may be difficult in these situations. Depending on the functionality tied to the dial D, switch, or button B, it may be desirable to provide a readily-accessibly input component that can be actuated quickly and reliably — for example, a mute button or a power button.

[00663] The dial, switch or button B can be pressed to activate a function of the base unit 50. Pressing the switch or button B can transmit a signal along the tether either wirelessly or by a wired tether to the base unit 50 to control a component of the base unit. In one example, the dial D, switch, or button B can be pressed to control the operation of the blower. In this example, the button is pressed and held pressed in order to cause the blower to speed up and increase flow rate delivered or pressure delivered. When the switch or button B is released, the blower can be slowed down to reduce flow rate or reduce delivered pressure. Such a button function can be used in manually controlling pressure or flow delivered to the patient. Alternatively, pressing the button can switch off the heater wire of a heated breathing conduit or switch off the heater plate of a humidifier.

[00664] Because the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000 are connected to exterior surfaces of the base units 50 of the breathing assistance apparatuses, they can be dimensioned larger than the portion of the base unit that they connect to. For example, the width of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is not directly restricted by the width of the screen carrier 211 and can be wider than the screen carrier. [00665] The positioning of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 when connected to the base unit 50 does not interfere with gases inputs into the base unit 50 or with the breathing conduit 16 to the patient interface.

[00666] Figures 50-57, and 64-68 show an alternative portable display unit 4000 for use with any of the breathing assistance apparatuses described herein. Unless described below, the features, functioning, and options are the same as for portable display unit 3000 or portable display unit 3500, and like reference numerals indicate like parts with the addition of 1000 and 500 respectively.

[00667] As outlined above, any one or more described features and functionality can be used in various combinations in any one or more of the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00668] Figures 58-64 and 68-72 show additional details of an alternative configuration of the breathing assistance apparatus of Figures 17-20. Unless described differently below, the features, functions, and options are the same as for the breathing assistance apparatus of Figures 17-20. Like reference numbers indicate like parts to Figures 17-20.

[00669] The breathing assistance apparatus of Figures 58-64 and 68-72 can be used with any of the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000 disclosed herein.

[00670] In at least some exemplary configurations, a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit 50; a portable display unit 4000 comprising: a display unit housing 4001; a screen 4051; and at least one connection feature 4071 for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50 and to a different support component; and a tethering component for tethering the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50.

[00671] The different support component may comprise one or more of the support components described with reference to Figures 43-49 for example.

[00672] The removable connection of the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50 and the different support component may be by way of the same type of connection. Alternatively, the removable connection of the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50 and the different support component may be by way of different types of connection.

[00673] The tethering component may comprise a cable 4061 for physically tethering the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50. [00674] The cable may be for communicating power to the portable display 4000 unit from the base unit 50 and/or for communicating data between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50.

[00675] The tethering component TCI may comprise a component of a wireless communication interface for communicating data between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50.

[00676] In at least some exemplary configurations, breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit 50; a portable display unit 4000 comprising: a display unit housing 4001; and a screen 4051; and a tethering component for tethering the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50; wherein the base unit 50 comprises at least one complementary connection feature 2071 for cooperating with at least one connection feature 4071 on the portable display unit 4000 for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50.

[00677] The tethering component may comprise a cable 4061 for physically tethering the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50.

[00678] The cable may be for communicating power to the portable display 4000 unit from the base unit 50 and/or for communicating data between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50.

[00679] The tethering component may comprise a component of a wireless communication interface for communicating data between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50.

[00680] The breathing assistance apparatus may comprise a (integrated) humidifier. In an alternative configuration, the breathing assistance apparatus may not comprise a humidifier.

[00681] In the configuration shown, the base unit comprises a recess 108 for receipt of a humidification chamber 300 (not shown in these figures). The features and functionality of the humidifier may be as described herein.

[00682] The humidifier is configured to be placed below patient head height.

[00683] In some configurations, the humidifier is configured to be placed below patient level or below patient bed level.

[00684] The base unit/humidifier will be the lowest point when the breathing assistance apparatus is set up for use. [00685] The breathing assistance apparatus may further comprise a breathing circuit in fluid communication with the humidifier, the breathing circuit comprising a patient interface to deliver gases to a patient. The breathing circuit also comprises a heated conduit. In single-limb circuits, the heated conduit may be referred to as an inspiratory conduit. In dual-limb circuits, there may be an additional expiratory conduit which may be a heated conduit or an unheated conduit.

[00686] The breathing circuit and humidifier are configured such that when the humidifier is placed below patient head height, any condensate which accumulates in the breathing circuit is encouraged to return to the humidifier rather than collecting at the patient interface. The breathing circuit may be any of the types described herein.

[00687] The portable display unit 4000 is configured to be placed above the base unit 50 and/or the humidifier.

[00688] The portable display unit 4000 and the humidifier are configured such that when the display unit is above humidifier, the portable display unit 4000 enables user interaction and control of the breathing assistance apparatus from an elevated position above the humidifier, optionally at or near eye level of a user.

[00689] The elevated position may be separate from the base unit 50 and vertically higher than the base unit 50 and the humidifier.

[00690] The at least one connection feature 4071 may be engageable with at least one complementary connection feature 2071 of the base unit 50.

[00691] The at least one connection feature 4071 of the portable display unit 4000 may comprises a first connection component 4071'.

[00692] The complementary connection feature 2071 of the base unit may comprise a second connection component on the base unit 50 and/or on the different support component.

[00693] The first connection component and the second connection component may be components of a sliding connector.

[00694] The sliding connector may comprise a dovetail connector.

[00695] The first component 4071' and second component 2071 may be engageable with each other in a sliding action of one component relative to the other. For example, the first component 4071' may be engageable with the second component 2071 in a sliding action of one component relative to the other.

[00696] In one exemplary configuration, the sliding action of the first component 4071' may be forwardly, relative to the second component 2071. This may define the sliding action in the first direction.

[00697] Once engaged, the first component 4071' and second component 2071 may not be disengageable by attempted movement of the first component 4071' relative to the second component 2071 in a direction transverse to the first direction. The first component 4071' may only be disengageable from the second component 2071 by moving the first component 4071' relative to the second component 2071 in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction.

[00698] In one exemplary configuration, the second direction is rearward. For example, a sliding action of the first component 4071' rearwardly, relative to the second component 2071, may allow the first component 4071' to be disengaged from the second component 2071.

[00699] One of the first component 4071' and the second component 2071 may comprise a male component, and the other of the first component 4071' and the second component 2071 may comprise a complementary female component to receive the male component. For example, the male component may be provided on the portable display unit 4000 and the female component may be provided on the base unit 50 or on the different support component. Alternatively, the female component may be provided on the portable display unit 4000 and the male component may be provided on the base unit 50' or on the different support component.

[00700] Figure 53 shows an exemplary configuration of the first component 4071'. Figures 58-60 show an exemplary configuration of the second component 2071.

[00701] The first component 4071' will typically be positioned on or in the base 4009 of the display unit housing.

[00702] The first component 4071' could be provided in any suitable position on the display unit housing 4001. For example, towards the rear wall 4005 of the display unit, towards the front wall 4003 of the display unit, and/or towards one or other of the side walls 4007 of the display unit housing 4001.

[00703] For example, to interface with the second component 2071 shown in Figures 58-60, the first component 4071' may be positioned more towards the front wall 4003 of the display unit compared with what is shown in Figure 53, where the first component 4071' is positioned towards the rear wall 4005.

[00704] The first component 4071' could project from the display unit housing 4001 to enable easier connection with the base unit 50 or a display mounting component 2072 (see, for example, Figure 70), or could be recessed in the display unit housing 4001 to provide a more slimline configuration.

[00705] The second component 2071 could project from the base unit 50 or could be recessed into the base unit 50. The second component 2071 could be provided in any suitable location on the base unit.

[00706] The same options are available for any of the other described connector component(s) and complementary connector component(s).

[00707] In the configuration shown, the first component 4071' comprises a tongue and the second component 2071 comprises a receiver or cradle for the tongue. The receiver may act as a cradle to hold part of the tongue when the first component 4071' is connected to the second component 2071.

[00708] The first component 4071' (i.e., the tongue) and the second component 2071 (i.e., the receiver or cradle) may comprise components of a dovetail connector.

[00709] The tongue has a proximal portion 4071a connected to the display unit housing 4001 and a distal portion 4071b. The tongue may be connected to the display unit housing 4001 along the length of the tongue or alternatively may only have the proximal end 4071a connected to the display unit housing 4001. The tongue may be integrally formed with the display unit housing 4001 or may be fastened to the display unit housing 4001.

[00710] The receiver comprises a forward wall 2075, two side walls 2077, and two inwardly directed flanges 2079. The flanges 2079 are spaced apart to provide a relatively narrow spacing 2081 between the flanges. An end of the housing opposite the forward wall 2075 defines a relatively wide opening 2083' that is wider than the spacing 2081.

[00711] The portable display unit 4000 connects to, and separates from, the housing of the base unit 50 by a sliding action of the portable display unit relative to the base unit 50. In the configuration shown, the distal portion 4071b of the first component 4071' is inserted into the connection housing under the flanges 2079 and slid forwardly, so that the distal portion 4071b is substantially received within the flanges with the proximal portion 4071a positioned between the flanges. Because the connection feature on the base unit 50 is angled, gravity will assist with retaining the portable display unit 4000 in connection with the base unit 50. To separate the portable display unit 4000 from the base unit, the portable display unit is slid rearward ly relative to the screen carrier 211 until the first component 4071' clears the flanges 2079.

[00712] The connection may be such that a user can lift the base unit 50 by lifting the portable display unit 4000 while it is connected to the base unit 50.

[00713] In an alternative configuration, the first component 4071' could have the configuration shown and described for the connection feature 3071. The functionality of this configuration is substantially the same as described.

[00714] The breathing assistance apparatus may comprise a display mounting component 2072 that comprises the complementary connection feature 2071.

[00715] The display mounting component 2072 is connectable to the base unit 50.

[00716] The display mounting component 2072 may be connectable to the screen carrier 211 of the base unit 50, or may be connectable to the main housing 100 of the base unit 50. The display mounting component 2072 may be removably connected to the main housing 100 or the screen carrier 211 of the base unit 50.

[00717] The display mounting component 2072 may connect to the base unit 50 by way of fasteners, integrated clip features, or the like.

[00718] The display mounting component 2072 may comprise a cable receptacle 2072a (see, for example, Figure 70) for receipt of the cable 4061 which enters or is otherwise secured to the base unit 50 by way of the display mounting component 2072. Removal of the display mounting component 2072 may allow the cable 4061 to be disconnected from the base unit 50 and replaced.

[00719] As shown in Figures 58 and 64, the display unit mounting component 2072 enables the upper surface 211a of the screen carrier 211 to be relatively horizontal and low profile, with the display mounting component 2072 providing height and optionally an increased angle for the portable display unit 4000 when connected to the screen mount component 2072.

[00720] When a relatively steep display mounting component 2072 is used, the first component 4071 may be provided near the front wall 4003 of the portable display unit 4000 to provide clearance. When a relatively flat display mounting component 2072 is used, the first component 4071 may be provided in the position shown in Figure 53 or may be provided elsewhere on the portable display unit 4000.

[00721] The display mounting component 2072 and the base unit 50 (e.g., the screen carrier 211 or the main housing 100) may comprise complementary tongue and groove engagement features that engage with each other to inhibit water ingress into the main housing 100.

[00722] In an alternative configuration, the complementary connection feature 2071 may be provided as part of the screen carrier 211 or main housing 100. That is, the complementary connection feature 2071 may be integrally formed as part of the screen carrier 211 or main unit housing 100. Figure 71 shows an exemplary configuration of this arrangement.

[00723] In this configuration, the cable 4061 may be attached to the main housing 100 or screen carrier 211.

[00724] In an alternative configuration of the portable display unit 4000, the first component 4071 may have the configuration described for the connection feature 3071 or the connection feature 3571.

[00725] The portable display unit 4000 may comprise a retention feature 4074 that is configured to positively engage with a complementary retention feature 2074 on the base unit 50 upon connection of the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50.

[00726] Therefore, the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50 may comprise complementary retention features 4074, 2074 (Figures 53 and 71) that positively engage with each other upon connection of the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50. The retention feature 4074 of the portable display unit 4000 is configured to engage with the complementary retention feature 2074 of the base unit 50 upon connection of the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50.

[00727] The retention features 4074, 2074 positively engage with each other.

[00728] The retention features 4074, 2074 may require disengagement to enable disconnection of the portable display unit 4000 from the base unit 50. The retention features 4074, 2074 may be selectively releasable from engagement with each other to enable disconnection of the portable display unit 4000 from the base unit 50. [00729] In an exemplary configuration, the retention feature 4074 on the portable display unit 4000 comprises a projection or recess that is engageable with a complementary projection or recess 2074 on the base unit 50.

[00730] The retention features 2074, 4074 may comprise a clip or buckle-type structure that is engageable with a corresponding clip or buckle portion on the base unit. The retention features 2074, 4074 may be such that they require the user to physically press or engage one of the features from the other in order to releasably engage or disengage the features from one another.

[00731] The retention features 4074, 2074 could have any suitable shape, such as elongate, round, or polygonal for example.

[00732] The retention features 4074, 2074 may be provided on the connection features 4071, 2071 or may be provided adjacent the connection features 4071, 2071 or elsewhere on the portable display unit 4000 and base unit 50.

[00733] For example, one of the retention features 4074 may be provided on the tongue of the first connection feature 4071 and the other retention feature 2074 may be provided on the receiver of the second connection feature 2071.

[00734] In an alternative configuration, the first retention feature 4074 may be provided on the portable display unit housing 4001, and the second retention feature 2074 may be provided on the base unit 50 such as on the screen carrier 211 or the main housing 100 for example.

[00735] The retention feature 4074, 2074 on the portable display unit 4000 or on the base unit 50 may be provided on a selectively movable portion of the portable display unit 4000 or base unit 50, Selective movement of the selectively movable portion may disengage the retention features 4074, 2074 from each other to enable the connection feature 4071 and complementary connection feature 2071 to be disengaged from each other.

[00736] In the configuration shown in Figure 71, the retention feature 2074 may be provided on the screen carrier 211 at or towards a forward edge thereof. Applying a downward force in direction DF at a location at or adjacent to the retention feature 2074 will disengage the retention features 4074, 2074 from each other. That will enable the connection feature 4071 and complementary connection feature 2071 to be disengaged from each other by sliding the portable display unit 4000 rearward relative to the base unit 50. [00737] The location at which the downward force DF is to be applied will be exposed for access when the portable display unit 4000 is connected to the housing 50.

[00738] When the complementary connection feature 2071 is used on a different support component, the retention feature 2074 may be provided on that different support component. As non-limiting examples, a different support component may be or may include a medical pole, incubator, or other component such as those typically used in a medical setting.

[00739] The retention features 4074, 2074 may provide enhanced frictional engagement between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50, and/or may provide haptic and/or audible feedback of full connection of the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50.

[00740] The same connection feature 4071 and complementary connection feature 2071 may be used for connecting the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50 and with the different support component. Alternatively, different connection features may be used.

[00741] As outlined above, an additional or alternative connection feature 4071 may comprise magnet(s) and may predominantly use magnetic force for the connection or may use magnetic force to bias the connection.

[00742] For example, one of the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50/different support component may comprise one or more magnets, and the other of the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50/different support component may comprise one or more magnets or magnetisable material. The magnet(s) on the portable display unit 4000 or base unit 50/different support component may cooperate with the magnet(s) or magnetisable material on the other of the portable display unit 4000 and base unit 50/different support component.

[00743] In an exemplary configuration, the at least one connection feature 4071 may further comprise a magnet 4071" (see, for example, Figure 53).

[00744] The magnet 4071" is configured to cooperate with a magnet or a magnetisable material 2071" on the base unit 50 (as shown in Figure 58, for example) and/or on the different support component.

[00745] In an alternative configuration, the base unit 50 and/or different support component may comprise a magnet and the portable display unit 4000 may comprise a magnet or magnetisable material. This may be provided in addition to the connector 4071 and complementary connector component 2071. This may strengthen the connection provided by the connector 4071 and the complementary connector component 2071. The magnets may also help to snap the portable display unit 4000 in place with the base unit 50 and/or different support component and help to hold the portable display unit 4000 in place. This may also help minimise wobbling and the like.

[00746] In some configurations, the at least one connection feature 4071 comprises a first connection feature 4071" for removably connecting the portable display unit to the base unit 50, and a second connection feature 4071' for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the different support component, wherein the first connection feature is different to the second connection feature.

[00747] In some configurations, the first connection feature 4071" may be configured to provide a relatively weak connection of the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50 while the second connection feature 4071' may be configured to provide a relatively strong connection of the portable display unit 4000 to the different support component.

[00748] With this configuration, the portable display unit 4000 can be easily disconnected from the base unit 50 so that lifting the portable display unit 4000 will not cause the base unit 50 to inadvertently be moved or lifted off a support surface, which may be important when therapy is being provided, as movement of the base unit may affect the therapy provided. It may also enable the portable display unit 4000 to be accessed easily and used during emergency situations, for example the relatively weak connection provided by the first connection feature 4071" allows for the portable display unit 4000 to be quickly removed from the base unit 50 without the disengagement and/or removal of the portable display unit 4000 from the base unit 50. Additionally, the portable display unit 4000 is unlikely to inadvertently disconnect from the different support component by way of the relatively strong connection provided by the second connection feature 4071', which reduces the likelihood of the portable display unit 4000 being disconnected or dropped from the different support component. This is particularly advantageous if the different support component is a portable component such as a medical pole for example.

[00749] For example, the first connection feature 4071" may comprise part of the magnetic connection arrangement discussed above, and the second connection feature 4071' may comprise a first component of a sliding connector as discussed above. [00750] Accordingly, in an exemplary configuration the first connection feature 4071" comprises a magnet configured to cooperate with a magnet or a magnetisable material on the base unit 50. Alternatively, the first connection feature 4071" may comprise a magnetisable material configured to cooperate with a magnet on the base unit 50.

[00751] The second connector feature 4071' in this configuration may comprise a first component of the sliding connector that is engageable with a second component of the sliding connector on the different support component. The different support component may comprise the second component of the sliding connector described above, such as the receiver for example.

[00752] The first connection feature 4071" may provide an additional secondary connection for the different support component. That is, the magnetic connection may not be the primary connector on the different support component, but may add to the strength of the connection provided by the second connection feature 4071'.

[00753] Rather than being provided on the base 4009 of the portable display unit 4000 and the upper surface 211a of the screen carrier 211, the connection features 4071, 2071 could be provided elsewhere on the portable display unit 4000 and/or base unit 50, with the connection and removal directions varying accordingly.

[00754] The breathing assistance apparatus may comprise at least one alignment feature to assist with aligning the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50 during connection of the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50.

[00755] The at least one alignment feature may be provided on the base unit 50 and/or on the portable display unit 4000.

[00756] The at least one alignment feature may comprise an alignment surface on the base unit 50 that is configured to interact with a complementary alignment surface on the portable display unit 4000.

[00757] For example, in the configuration of Figures 53 and 72, the base unit 50, and optionally the display mounting component 2072 of the base unit 50, comprises at least one alignment surface 2076 that is configured to interact with at least one complementary alignment surface 4076 on the portable display unit 4000.

[00758] The base unit 50 and the portable display unit 4000 may each comprise one, two, three, or more complementary alignment surfaces. [00759] When a sliding connector is used, the alignment surfaces 2076, 4076 are oriented to be parallel to a sliding connection and disconnection direction of the portable display unit with the base unit 50.

[00760] In the configuration shown, the alignment surfaces 2076 are provided by side walls of the receiver of the base unit, and the alignment surfaces 4076 are provided by walls of a channel or groove in the base 4009 of the display unit housing 1004. The alignment surfaces could alternatively be provided by other walls or members on the base unit 50 and the portable display unit 4000. For example, the alignment surfaces could be provided by protrusion(s) on the base unit 50 or portable display unit 4000 to interact with complementary protrusion(s) or recess(es) on the other of the base unit 50 and the portable display unit 4000.

[00761] Channels may be provided between the complementary alignment surfaces 4076 and the tongue of the connector 4071 to provide a space for receipt of the walls of the receiver of the base unit.

[00762] Figure 72 shows an alternative configuration of the base unit 50. In this configuration, the receiver 2071' is configured to receive the connector 4071. However, the receiver 2071' does not comprise the flanges 2079 of the configuration shown in Figure 71. Instead, the receiver 2071' comprises an enlarged region 2083 along its length.

[00763] The tongue of the connector 4071 is configured to be received in the receiver 2071' of the configuration shown in Figure 72 when the portable display unit 4000 is connected to the base unit 50 via the magnetic arrangement comprising the magnet(s) and/or magnetisable material.

[00764] In this configuration, the receiver 2071' act as an alignment feature/locator for the tongue of the connector 4071, but not as the primary connection feature between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50.

[00765] The tongue of the connector 4071 may comprise the magnet and the receiver 2071' may comprise the magnet or magentisable material, or vice-versa.

[00766] In addition to this alignment feature/locator, the base unit 50 may have one or more alignment features 2076 as discussed above.

[00767] The receiver 2071 of the configuration shown in Figure 72 can be provided on the main housing 100, screen carrier 211, or on a display unit mounting 2072 of the type described above with reference to Figure 70. [00768] In the configurations shown for the base unit 50, the base unit does not have a handle portion 506 or lever 500. In alternative configurations, a handle portion or lever may be provided.

[00769] In the configurations shown for the portable display unit 4000 and base unit 50, space is maximised for the portable display unit 4000. As shown in Figure 64 for example, the portable display unit 4000 can be at least as wide as the main housing 100 of the base unit 50 and may be large enough to project beyond a rear edge of the main housing 100 of the base unit. The positioning of the portable display unit 4000 when connected to the base unit 50 does not interfere with gases inputs into the base unit 50' or with the patient conduit 16 to the patient interface.

[00770] The base unit 50 may comprise a filter inlet 115 for delivery of gases into a filter of the base unit. The filter is an inlet filter to the flow generator/blower module of the breathing assistance apparatus, configured to filter airborne contaminants and prevent their entry into the gases flow path The filter inlet 115 may be provided at or adjacent a rear corner of the main housing 100 of the base unit 50. The filter inlet 115 may be located under a portion of the portable display unit 4000 when the portable display unit 4000 is connected to the base unit 50.

[00771] In some exemplary configurations, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be provided with a notification light. In some configurations, a portable display unit 4000 for a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the portable display unit comprising: a display unit housing 4001; a screen 4051; at least one connection feature 4071 for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to a base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus; and a notification light 4150, 4150'.

[00772] An exemplary configuration of a portable display unit with a notification light is shown in Figures 55-57.

[00773] The display unit housing 4001 comprises a front wall 4003, a rear wall 4005, opposed side walls 4007, and a base wall 4009.

[00774] In the configuration shown, the notification light 4150, 4150' is provided in or on at least one external surface of the display unit housing 4001. The notification light 4150, 4150' may project outwardly from the external surface(s) for better visibility.

[00775] The notification light 4150, 4150' could be on or in any wall/surface or any combination of walls/surfaces of the display unit housing 4001. [00776] As one example, in the configuration shown in Figure 55, the notification light 4150 is provided in a rear wall 4005 and base wall 4009 of the display unit housing 4001. As another example, in the configuration shown in Figure 56, the notification light 4150' is provided in the rear wall 4005 of the display unit housing 4001.

[00777] The notification light 4150, 4150' may be visible from at least a portion of the portable display unit comprising the screen 4051. In some configurations, the display unit housing 4001 comprises a transparent portion in an upper surface 4013 of the display unit housing, and the notification light is visible through the transparent portion. The transparent portion could be in any surface or combination of surfaces.

[00778] In some configurations, the notification light 4150, 4150' projects from a rear of the display unit housing 4001, such that the notification light 4150, 4150' is visible from at least a rear, an upper surface, a left side, a right side, and a base of the portable display unit. The notification light could project from any surface or combination of surfaces.

[00779] In some configurations, the notification light is visible from at least a rear, an upper surface, a left side, a right side, and a base of the portable display unit.

[00780] The notification light 4150, 4150' may be visible from substantially a 360-degree viewing angle around the portable display unit 4000.

[00781] The notification light 4150, 4150' may be provided within the display unit housing 4001. The display unit housing 4001 may comprise a transparent portion, such that the notification light is visible through the transparent portion.

[00782] In some configurations, the display unit housing 4001 comprises at least one transparent portion, and wherein the notification light 4150 is visible through the at least one transparent portion so as to be visible from 360 degrees around the display unit housing 4001. The transparent portion(s) may protrude from the display unit housing 4001 to provide the 360-degree visibility.

[00783] The notification light 4150, 4150' may be configured to provide a visual alert in response to an alarm condition.

[00784] The alarm condition may comprise an alarm condition of the portable display unit 4000 and/or an alarm condition of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00785] Exemplary alarm conditions of the breathing assistance apparatus include one or more of: can't reach target oxygen, oxygen detected when therapy off, SpO₂ below target, high leak, chamber leak, empty chamber, no mains power, patient end temperature sensor readings are above a threshold temperature, heater plate temperature sensor readings are above a threshold temperature.

[00786] Exemplary alarm conditions of the portable display unit include one or more of: disconnection of a cable 4061 between the portable display unit 50 and a base unit of the breathing assistance apparatus, physical or wireless communication disconnection from the breathing assistance apparatus, poor communications latency with the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00787] The notification light 4150, 4150' may comprise one or more light elements. For example, the notification light 4150, 4150' may comprise one or more LEDs. In an alternative configuration, the notification light 4150, 4150' may comprise a backlight of the screen 4051 or user input components such as the button(s) B. In this configuration, the display unit housing may comprise the transparent portion such that the backlight becomes visible during a visual notification.

[00788] The notification light 4150, 4150' may comprise a plurality of lights of different colours. For example, the notification light 4150, 4150' may comprise a plurality of LEDs of different colours, or may comprise multicolour/RGB LEDs.

[00789] LEDs may be provided in a row such that the LEDs are able to be lit in a sequence or pattern which is used by the user or clinician to identify an alarm condition. The pattern or sequence may light the multiple LEDs in a sequence of illuminated/unilluminated to form a recognisable and/or repeated pattern, the pattern or sequence may additionally or alternatively define the lighting of the LEDs in different colours which define a pattern.

[00790] The notification light 4150, 4150' may be configured as an elongate light bar that extends along a portion of at least one of the walls of the display unit housing 4001. In some embodiments the elongate light bar may project outwardly from the display unit housing 4001.

[00791] The notification light 4150, 4150' may be connected to the display unit housing via a clip configuration, or via fasteners or adhesive for example. Figure 57 shows an exemplary clip configuration. In this configuration, two opposed protrusions 4151 engage against wall edges 4005' of the wall 4005 of the display unit housing 4001. The protrusions 4151 may be tapered to enable relatively easy engagement of the notification light 4150' with the wall, but to inhibit disengagement of the notification light 4150' from the wall. [00792] A seal or gasket 4155 such as an O-ring for example may be provided between the notification light 4150, 4150' and the display unit housing 4001 to assist with hermetically sealing the display unit housing against water and/or oxygen ingress.

[00793] The seal or gasket may comprise silicone or any other suitable material.

[00794] The portable display unit may further comprise a notification speaker S as shown schematically in Figure 54.

[00795] In an alternative configuration, the portable display unit may comprise a speaker but no notification light.

[00796] The notification speaker S is configured to provide an audio alert in response to an alarm condition.

[00797] The alarm condition may comprise an alarm condition of the portable display unit 4000 and/or an alarm condition of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00798] Exemplary alarm conditions of the breathing assistance apparatus include one or more of: can't reach target oxygen, oxygen detected when therapy off, SpO₂ below target, high leak, chamber leak, empty chamber, no mains power, patient end temperature sensor readings are above a threshold temperature, heater plate temperature sensor readings are above a threshold temperature.

[00799] Exemplary alarm conditions of the portable display unit include one or more of: disconnection of a cable 4061 between the portable display unit and a base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus, physical or wireless communication disconnection from the breathing assistance apparatus, poor (i.e., increased) communications latency with the breathing assistance apparatus, or that the portable display unit is no longer in close proximity with the base unit or has moved out of a predefined acceptable range from the base unit (this could be indicated by the latency between the display and the base unit exceeding a threshold for example).

[00800] In some configurations, the notification light 4150, 4150' and the notification speaker S are configured to operate in combination to provide alerts. That is, when the notification light 4150, 4150' issues a visual alert the notification speaker S may issue an audible alert in tandem.

[00801] The portable display unit with a notification light 4150, 4150' and optionally with a notification speaker S may be used with, or provided in combination with, a breathing assistance apparatus having a base unit 50. Base unit

[00802] In some configurations, the combination of a breathing assistance apparatus comprising a base unit 50 with a housing 100 having a gas port 21 and the above portable display unit 4000 is provided. An exemplary configuration is shown in Figures 58-64.

[00803] The base unit 50 may comprise a base unit notification light 240.

[00804] In the configuration shown, the base unit notification light 240 is provided in or on at least one external surface of the base unit 50.

[00805] The base unit notification light 240 may be provided within the housing 100 or screen carrier 211 or shroud 190 of the base unit 50. The housing 100 or screen carrier 211 or shroud 190 of the base unit 50 may comprise a transparent portion, and the notification light 240 may be visible through the transparent portion.

[00806] As one example, in the configuration shown, the base unit notification light 240 is provided on or in an upper wall of the base unit. For example, the base unit notification light 240 may be provided in an upper wall of the screen carrier 211. Alternatively, the base unit notification light 240 may be provided in an upper wall of the main housing 100. As another alternative, the base unit notification light 240 may be provided in a different wall of the screen carrier 211 or the main housing 100.

[00807] The base unit notification light 240 may project outwardly from the base unit.

[00808] The base unit notification light 240 may be visible from at least a top of the base unit.

[00809] As shown in Figure 64, the base unit notification light 240 is advantageously visible from an upper forward region of the base unit 50 when the portable display unit 4000 is connected to the base unit 50.

[00810] The base unit notification light 240 may be configured to provide a visual alert in response to an alarm condition.

[00811] The alarm condition may comprise an alarm condition of the portable display unit 4000 and/or an alarm condition of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00812] Exemplary alarm conditions include one or more of: disconnection of a cable 4061 between the portable display unit 4000 and a base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus, physical or wireless communication disconnection of the portable display unit 4000 from the breathing assistance apparatus, poor (i.e., increased) communications latency between the portable display unit 4000 and the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00813] In some configurations, the portable display unit notification light 4150, 4150' and the base unit notification light 240 are configured to operate in combination to provide alerts. That is, when the portable display unit notification light 4150, 4150' issues a visual alert the base unit notification light 240 may issue a corresponding or the same visual alert. They may issue those alerts in combination with the audible alert from the notification speaker S.

[00814] The base unit notification light 240 may comprise one or more light elements 240a. For example, the base unit notification light 240 may comprise one or more LEDs.

[00815] The base unit notification light 240 may be configured as an elongate light bar that extends along or across a portion of the base unit 50; for example, across a forward portion of the screen carrier 211 of the base unit. An exemplary light bar 240' configuration is shown in Figure 63.

[00816] The base unit notification light 240 may be configured to indicate different colours in response to different notification conditions. The notification conditions may relate to the portable display unit 4000.

[00817] For example, the base unit notification light 240 may indicate light of a first colour (e.g., green) to indicate that the portable display unit 4000 is properly connected to the base unit 50, and may indicate light of a second colour (e.g., red) to indicate that the portable display unit 4000 is not properly connected to the base unit 50. As another example, the base unit notification light 240 may indicate lights of different colours for when there is power connection between the base unit and the portable display unit but not data connection, and when there is data connection between the base unit and the portable display unit but no power connection. In situations where there is no power connection, the notification light 240 may be temporarily powered by a battery of the portable display unit or other energy storage elements such as capacitors.

[00818] When the base unit notification light 240 comprises a plurality of light elements 240a, the light elements may have different colours from each other to indicate the different notification colours. [00819] As shown in Figures 59 and 61-63 for example, the base unit 50 may comprise an interconnect circuit board 271 for providing data communication between the portable display unit and a main circuit board 272 (Figure 16) of the base unit 50. The interconnect circuit board may be a printed circuit board. The base unit notification light 240 may be coupled to the interconnect circuit board 271.

[00820] The light elements 240a may be coupled to, or provided on, the interconnect circuit board 271.

[00821] In one exemplary configuration, the light elements 240a are coupled or mounted at or adjacent a top edge 271a of the interconnect circuit board 271.

[00822] The interconnect circuit board 271 may allow for electrical and/or electronic connection with the portable display unit 4000 and the patient conduit 16. The interconnect circuit board 271 may include other electrical connectors for different conduits or connectors.

[00823] The interconnect circuit board 271 is in electrical communication with the main circuit board 272 and controls the connections to the portable display unit 4000, patient conduit 16, and other conduits or connectors as applicable.

[00824] The interconnect circuit board 271 has a cable connector 271b for receipt of the cable 4061 of the portable display unit 4000. The cable 4601 may comprise a connector 4601c to connect to the cable connector 271b. The cable connector 271b may be a power connector, a data connector, or a power and data connector. In one exemplary configuration, the cable connector 271b is a USB-C connector.

[00825] In some configurations, the portable display unit 4000 may comprise a button B, and a dial D. In some configurations, a portable display unit 4000 for a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the portable display unit 4000 comprising: a display unit housing 4001; a screen 4051; a cable physically tethering the portable display unit to a base unit of the breathing assistance apparatus; a button B; and a dial D.

[00826] In some configurations, the cable 4061 is for communicating power to the portable display unit 4000 from the base unit 50 and/or for communicating data between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50.

[00827] The button B may provide a first user input component and the dial D may provide a second user input component. [00828] The tethering component may provide a physical tether or a wireless tether of any of the types described herein.

[00829] An exemplary configuration of the portable display unit 4000 is shown in Figures 50-52.

[00830] The portable display unit 4000 may comprise one button B or may comprise a plurality of buttons B. In the configuration shown, the portable display unit comprises four buttons; however, the portable display unit 4000 may comprise one, two, three, four, or more buttons.

[00831] The button(s) B may be provided on any suitable surface of the portable display unit to enable user interaction with the button(s). In the configuration shown, the button(s) B are provided on the upper surface 4013 of the display unit housing 4001, adjacent to the screen 4051.

[00832] The screen 4051 may be a touch screen as outlined above, to enable the user to interact with the screen to control one or more functions of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00833] The button(s) may be electrical push button(s). Alternatively, the button(s) B may be membrane button(s).

[00834] Membrane button(s) may help with preventing water and oxygen ingress into the interior portion of the display unit housing.

[00835] The button(s) may be backlit.

[00836] The membrane button(s) may comprise a raised edge Bl and a centre portion B2 for pressing for interaction by a user. The centre portion B2 may be recessed from the raised edge Bl to minimise the likelihood of inadvertent actuation of the button(s).

[00837] The button(s) B may provide haptic feedback. The haptic feedback may be indicative of initiation of therapy modes of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00838] The dial D comprises a rotatable component DI to provide a user input.

[00839] In the configuration shown, the rotatable component DI comprises a rotatable knob. [00840] The rotatable component DI is configured to be actuated by a user rotating the rotatable component. The rotatable component DI is only movable with a rotating action, and is not movable in an axial direction of the dial.

[00841] The dial D further comprise a push button D2 to provide a different user input from the rotatable component.

[00842] The push button D2 is configured to be actuated by a user pushing the push button D2 in an axial direction towards the display unit housing 4001.

[00843] The rotatable component DI surrounds a periphery of the push button D2. A pushing surface D2' of the push button D2 is recessed within the rotatable component DI.

[00844] As a result, the rotatable component DI provides protection for the push button D2 by housing the push button D2 inside it, thereby providing impact protection for the push button D2 and reducing the likelihood of inadvertent actuation or damage of the push button D2 if a force is applied in an axial direction of the dial D. Forces applied generally in an axial direction of the dial D, unless specifically applied to only the push button D2, will instead be transmitted through the rotatable component DI and then through the display unit housing 4001, rather than through the push button D2 to the circuit board 4004 in Figure 52.

[00845] Additionally, because the pushing surface D2' is recessed within the rotatable component, if the portable display unit 4000 is placed face-down on a surface, this will not actuate the push button D2 and may inadvertently trigger or change settings of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00846] In the configuration shown, the dial D projects from the upper surface 4013 of the display unit housing 4001. Alternatively, the dial D may be recessed in the display unit housing 4001.

[00847] A biasing device D3 such as a spring is provided between the push button D2 and a base D4 of the dial, to bias the push button D2 in the axial direction away from the display unit housing 4001. A user pushes the push button D2 in the axial direction towards the display unit housing to actuate the push button D2.

[00848] The base D4 of the dial may comprise a rotary encoder to convert the rotating of the rotatable component DI to a digital signal. The base D4 may comprise a push button encoder which converts the push button D2 movement to a digital signal. [00849] In an alternative configuration, the dial D may have a rotatable component DI but no push button D2.

[00850] The portable display unit 4000 may comprise a proximity sensor 4101 to determine user presence.

[00851] The screen 4051 may be configured to dim or turn off if a user is not detected for a period of time, as sensed by the proximity sensor 4101.

[00852] The proximity sensor 4101 may, for example, comprise an optical sensor, for example, an infrared sensor, a camera, etc. Other technologies may be used, for example, an ultrasonic sensor.

[00853] As outlined above, the portable display unit 4000 may further comprise an ambient light sensor 4102. The screen 4051 may be configured to adjust in brightness in response to ambient light changes.

[00854] The screen 4051 is recessed from the upper surface 4013 of the display unit housing 4001. That is, the display unit housing 4001 projects upwardly more than the screen 4051. That provides a level of impact protection for the screen - if the portable display unit 4000 is dropped or experiences an impact, there is unlikely to be a direct impact on the screen 4051.

[00855] As outlined above, the portable display unit may comprise at least one connection feature 4071 for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50 and to a different support component. As non-limiting examples, a different support component may be or may include a medical pole, incubator, or other component such as those typically used in a medical setting.

[00856] The at least one connection feature 4071 may comprise a first connection feature 4071" for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50 and may comprise a second connection feature 4071' for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the different support component, wherein the first connection feature is different to the second connection feature.

[00857] As outlined above, in some configurations an angular orientation of the screen 4051 can be adjusted.

[00858] In some configurations, the angular orientation of the display unit housing 4001 can be adjusted relative to the at least one connection feature 4071 and/or relative to the base unit 50. [00859] In some configurations, the portable display unit 4000 is hermetically sealed to prevent water and/or oxygen ingress into the portable display unit 4000 or through the portable display unit housing 4001. In some configurations, a portable display unit 4000 for a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the portable display unit comprising: a display unit housing 4001 defining an internal portion; a screen; and a tethering component 4061, TCI for tethering the portable display unit with a base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus; wherein the portable display unit 4000 is hermetically sealed to prevent water and/or oxygen ingress into the internal portion of the portable display unit.

[00860] The tethering component may comprise a cable 4061 (see, for example, Figures 53 and 59) for physically tethering the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50.

[00861] In some configurations, the cable 4061 is for communicating power to the portable display unit 4000 from the base unit 50 and/or for communicating data between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50.

[00862] The tethering component may comprise a component of a wireless communication interface for communicating data between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50.

[00863] As shown in Figure 54 for example, the display unit housing 4001 comprises a first housing portion 4001a and a second housing portion 4001b, and a seal or gasket 4002 is provided between the first housing portion 4001a and the second housing portion 4001b.

[00864] The seal or gasket 4002 may comprise a compressible seal or compressible gasket, and the compressible seal or compressible gasket may be compressed between the first housing portion 4001a and the second housing portion 4001b in the assembled housing. The seal or gasket 4002 may comprise silicone or any other suitable material, including those described elsewhere herein for other seals or sealing functionality.

[00865] The seal or gasket 4002 may extend around the entire of the periphery of the display unit housing 4001 between the first housing portion 4001a and the second housing portion 4001b.

[00866] The portable display unit 4000 may comprise electrical and/or electronic components housed within the internal portion of the display unit housing 4001. Ill

[00867] The electrical and/or electronics components may comprise a circuit board 4004. The circuit board 4004 may comprise a printed circuit board (PCB).

[00868] The circuit board 4004 may be surrounded by a sealing material to prevent water and/or oxygen ingress into the circuit board.

[00869] In one exemplary configuration, the circuit board 4004 has the sealing material overmoulded onto the circuit board 4004.

[00870] The sealing material may be further configured to provide shock absorption and/or heat dissipation for the circuit board.

[00871] Suitable materials for the sealing material include those described elsewhere herein for shock absorption and heat dissipation functionality.

[00872] The portable display unit 4000 may further comprise a temperature sensor 4103 to determine if temperature in the internal portion of the portable display unit housing exceeds a threshold value. The temperature sensor 4103 may be provided on the circuit board 4004 or elsewhere.

[00873] The portable display unit 4000 may further comprise an oxygen sensor 4104 to determine if oxygen is detected in the internal portion of the portable display unit housing above a threshold value. The oxygen sensor 4104 may be provided on the circuit board 4004 or elsewhere.

[00874] The oxygen sensor 4104 may detect if oxygen is above a predetermined level, which may indicate a safety risk.

[00875] A seal or gasket 4155 such as an O-ring for example may be provided between the notification light 4150, 4150' and the display unit housing 4001 to assist with hermetically sealing the display unit housing against water and/or oxygen ingress.

[00876] A seal or gasket E such as an O-ring for example may be provided between the button(s) B and the display unit housing 4001 and/or between the dial D and the display unit housing 4001 to assist with hermetically sealing the display unit housing against water and/or oxygen ingress.

[00877] The tethering component may provide a physical tether or a wireless tether of any of the types described herein. [00878] As outlined above, the portable display unit 4000 may comprise at least one connection feature 4071 for removably connecting the portable display unit to the base unit 50 and to a different support component.

[00879] The at least one connection feature 4071 may comprise a first connection feature 4071" for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50 and may comprise a second connection feature 4071' for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the different support component, wherein the first connection feature 4071" is different to the second connection feature 4071'.

[00880] As outlined above, the screen 4051 may be recessed from an upper surface 4013 of the display unit housing. In some configurations, a portable display unit 4000 for a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the portable display unit comprising: a display unit housing 4001 having an upper surface; a screen 4051; and a tethering component 4061, TCI for tethering the portable display unit 4000 with a base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus; wherein the screen 4051 is recessed from the upper surface 4103 of the display unit housing 4001.

[00881] An exemplary configuration is shown in Figure 50.

[00882] The upper surface 4013 of the display unit housing 4001 may comprise an opening for the screen 4051. The screen 4051 may be at least partly located in and/or visible through, the opening in the upper surface 4013.

[00883] The display unit housing 4001 projects upwardly more than the screen 4051. This provides a level of impact protection for the screen 4051.

[00884] The material(s) of the display unit housing 4001 may be chosen to provide impact protection. Exemplary materials include polycarbonate, polycarbonate blends, or other plastics materials.

[00885] Because the portable display unit 4000 has few or no moving parts, the material selection for the display unit housing 4001 may be a primary factor in resisting shock, impact, or drop damage.

[00886] The portable display unit 4000 may comprise features or functionality to indicate suitability for use following an impact or being dropped. For example, the portable display unit 4000 may be configured to withstand being dropped from a certain height, but the screen 4051 or a notification light may be configured to indicate whether an impact of more than a predetermined force has been experienced by the screen, indicating that a drop from a greater height has occurred. [00887] The portable display unit 4000 may further comprise a sensor to detect if the portable display unit has been dropped or otherwise impacted. The sensor may comprise an accelerometer or a gyroscope for example. Additionally, or alternatively, the sensor may detect the angle of orientation of the portable display unit 4000.

[00888] At least a portion of one or more corners and/or edges of the display unit housing 4001 may comprise or be integrally formed from an impact absorbent material, as described above for the corners 3511 of the display unit housing 3501.

[00889] The impact absorbent material may extend partly over the upper surface 4013 and a base 4009 of the display unit housing 4001.

[00890] In some configurations, the impact absorbent material is integrally formed with the display unit housing 4001. Alternatively, the impact absorbent material may be removable from the display unit housing 4001.

[00891] As outlined above, the display unit housing may define an internal portion, and the portable display unit may comprise electrical and/or electronic components housed within the internal portion of the display unit housing 4001.

[00892] The electrical and/or electronics components may comprise a circuit board 4004. The circuit board 4004 may comprise a printed circuit board (PCB).

[00893] The circuit board 4004 may be surrounded by a material that is configured to provide shock absorption, including those materials described elsewhere herein for shock absorption functionality. Additionally, or alternatively, the material may be a potting compound, such as a foam, or polystyrene.

[00894] In some configurations, the screen 4051 is held loosely or suspended in the display unit housing 4001. This provides for a level of shock protection for the screen 4051.

[00895] For example, the screen 4051 may be mounted in the display unit housing 4001 on resiliently deformable member(s). The member(s) may comprise bush(es) or suspension member(s). In one exemplary configuration, a suspension member may be provided at or adjacent each corner of the screen 4051 and may movably mount the screen 4051 to the display unit housing 4001.

[00896] As another example, the screen 4051 may be placed into the display unit housing 4001 and the screen 4051 may be clamped against the first housing portion 4001a. An impact absorbing material, such as a foam tape for example, is provided between the screen 4051 and the first housing portion 4001a.

[00897] The portable display unit may further comprise a sensor to detect if the portable display unit has been dropped. The sensor may comprise an accelerometer or a gyroscope for example. Additionally, or alternatively, the sensor may detect the angle of orientation of the portable display unit 4000.

[00898] As outlined above, the portable display unit 4000 may comprise a notification light 4150, 4150' and/or notification speaker S. The notification light 4150, 4150' and/or notification sensor S may provide a visual and/or audible alert if the sensor detects that the portable display unit 4000 has been dropped or otherwise impacted.

[00899] The tethering component may provide a physical tether or a wireless tether of any of the types described herein.

[00900] As outlined above, the portable display unit 4000 may comprise at least one connection feature 4071 for removably connecting the portable display unit to the base unit 50 and to a different support component.

[00901] The at least one connection 4071 feature may comprise a first connection feature 4071" for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the base unit 50 and may comprise a second connection feature 4071' for removably connecting the portable display unit 4000 to the different support component, wherein the first connection feature 4071" is different to the second connection feature 4071'.

[00902] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be provided with a screen cover 5001. An exemplary screen cover is shown in Figures 32 and 33.

[00903] The screen cover 5001 comprises a transparent flexible material, and is configured to cover at least the screen 3051, 3551, 4051 of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00904] In the configuration shown, the screen cover 5001 comprises an upper surface 5003 for covering the screen 3051, 3551, 4051 and a plurality of walls 5005 for extending around the walls 3003, 3005, 3007, 3503, 3505, 3507, 4003, 4005, 4007 of the display unit housing 3001, 3501. The screen cover 5001 may also be configured to extend partly around the base 3009, 3509, 4009 of the display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001. [00905] The screen cover 5001 preferably comprises a resilient material and may be an interference fit so that the screen cover 5001 needs to be stretched to mount the cover onto the display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001. That will assist with retaining the screen cover 5001 in place on the display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4501.

[00906] Additionally, or alternatively, the screen cover 5001 may comprise securing feature(s) to assist with retaining the screen in place on the display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001.

[00907] In the form shown in Figure 33, exemplary securing feature(s) comprise an elongate strap 5007 extending from one side of the cover 5001 and that is configured to couple to a connector 5009 extending from another side of the screen cover, so that the strap 5007 extends at least partly across the base of the display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001. Any other suitable configuration could be used. The strap 5007 and/or connector 5009 may comprise a buckle, hook and loop fasteners, or any other suitable coupler.

[00908] When the screen cover 5001 is in position on the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000, an air gap may be provided between the cover 5001 and the screen 3051, 3551, 4051. That will enable the touch screen to still be used if liquid contacts the cover 5001.

[00909] The air gap may additionally be provided between the cover 5001 and the display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001 to provide insulation from heat. This may help insulate the user from heat generated (internally) by the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000,

[00910] The screen cover 5001 may be a removable screen cover. Alternatively, the screen cover 5001 may be overmoulded onto the screen. When an overmoulded screen cover is used, the screen cover may not have securing feature(s).

[00911] When the screen cover 5001 is a removable screen cover, the screen cover 5001 may be removed from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and cleaned, sterilised, or disposed of, and may be replaced by a new cover 5001.

[00912] The screen cover 5001 may help prevent false touches (e.g., due to screen damage) on the screen 3051, 3551, 4051, and may help prevent water ingress into the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000. [00913] In some configurations, the screen cover 5001 may be sized and configured only cover the screen or the screen and the upper surface of the housing, rather than other parts of the housing.

[00914] Material selection for the screen cover 5001 may involve semi-rigid material which is tough enough to withstand impact. That is, the screen cover 5001 may comprise a semi-rigid material which is tough enough to withstand impact. This may be a singular piece with increased thickness at the corners of the screen cover corresponding to the corners of the portable display unit. The material will advantageously be thin enough, and transparent, to enable actuation/use of the touchscreen through the screen cover 5001.

[00915] Exemplary materials may include silicone or polyurethane. Other foam materials may be used to provide impact absorption.

[00916] When an overmoulded screen cover 5001 is provided, the screen cover 5001 may assist with preventing water and/or oxygen ingress into the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00917] The screen cover 5001 may provide heat sinking or heat transfer capabilities to enable the transfer of heat away from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 through thermal property selection of the material of the screen cover 5001.

[00918] Exemplary materials for the screen cover include silicone, thermally conductive silicone rubber, or any other suitable materials.

[00919] The screen cover 5001 may provide for enhanced grip of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00920] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be provided in combination with the breathing assistance apparatus, or may be provided as an aftermarket device for use with the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00921] The portable display unit may be used with any of the types of breathing assistance apparatuses disclosed herein. The breathing assistance apparatus may, for example, be a respiratory assistance apparatus, respiratory therapy device, or any other suitable type of breathing assistance apparatus.

[00922] Any of the breathing assistance apparatuses disclosed herein may comprise complementary connection feature(s) for engaging with the connection feature(s) of the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000, to removably connect the display unit to the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00923] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be connectable to and separable (or disconnectable) from the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00924] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be tethered with the base unit 50. The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be physically tethered with the base unit 50 and/or may be wirelessly tethered with the base unit 50 for communicating data between the portable display unit and the base unit.

[00925] In at least one exemplary configuration, a breathing assistance apparatus comprises: a humidifier 12, 1302a, 1302b, 300; a base unit 50; and a portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 comprising: a display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4001; a screen 3051, 3551, 4051; a communication interface for communicating data and/or control signals between the base unit 50 and the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000; and at least one connection feature 3071, 3571, 4071 for removably connecting the portable display unit to the base unit 50.

[00926] The humidifier may be provided in the base unit.

[00927] The communication interface may comprise at least one wire for communicating data and/or control signals between the portable display unit and the base unit.

[00928] The communication interface may comprise a wireless communication interface for communicating data and/or control signals between the portable display unit and the base unit.

[00929] Using the configurations shown in Figures 13-16 as a non-limiting example, in at least one exemplary configuration, a breathing assistance apparatus comprises: a base unit 50; a heating element 140 positioned on or within the base unit 50; a humidification chamber 300 associated with the heating element 140, such that the heating element 140 is in thermal communication with the humidification chamber 300; a controller 13 in electronic communication with the heating element 140; and a portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000, wherein the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is separable from the base unit 50, such that the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 can be separated from the base unit 50 and reconnected to the base unit 50, wherein the controller 13 is in electronic communication with the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 when the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is connected to and separated from the base unit 50, such that data and/or control signals can be transmitted from the controller 13 to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and data and/or control signals can be transmitted from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 to the controller 13. Power may be transmitted from the base unit 50, e.g., under control of the controller 13, to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00930] The breathing assistance apparatus may be configured to receive gases from an external source.

[00931] Alternatively, the breathing assistance apparatus may comprise a flow generator (e.g., a blower or motor module) in the base unit to generate a flow of pressurised gases.

[00932] The humidification chamber 300 may be removable from the base unit.

[00933] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be physically tethered to the base unit 50 to enable transmission of power from the base unit 50, e.g., under control of the controller 13 to the portable display unit. The physical tethering may be achieved by any of the configurations disclosed herein.

[00934] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be physically tethered to the base unit 50 to enable transmission of data from the controller to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and to enable transmission of data from the display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 to the controller 13. The physical tethering may be achieved by any of the configurations disclosed herein.

[00935] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be wirelessly tethered to the base unit 50 to enable transmission of data from the controller 13 to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and to enable transmission of data from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 to the controller 13. The wireless tethering may be by any of the configurations disclosed herein.

[00936] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 disclosed herein may be used as part of a modular breathing assistance apparatus. The breathing assistance apparatus may have a plurality of components comprising: a flow generator 11, 1301a, 1301b, 1307, 1726, 2125 to generate a flow of pressurised gases; a humidifier 12, 300, 1302a, 1302b, 2102, 2104 to humidify the gases; and a portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 including a display unit housing 3001, 3501, 4000, a screen 3051, 3551, 4051, and a tethering component (TCI, TC2, and/or TC3) for tethering the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 with at least one of the components of the breathing assistance apparatus, wherein the components are modular such that at least one of the components is separable from at least one other of the components.

[00937] In some configurations, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is separable from at least one other component of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[00938] In some configurations, the humidifier 12, 300, 1302a, 2102, 2104 and flow generator 11, 1301a, 1307, 1726, 2125 are separable from each other.

[00939] In some configurations, the humidifier 12, 1302a is in a humidifier housing, the flow generator 11, 1301a is in a separate flow generator housing, and the humidifier housing can be removably coupled to the flow generator housing.

[00940] In some configurations, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is separable and removably coupled to the flow generator housing.

[00941] In some configurations, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is separable and removably coupled to the humidifier housing.

[00942] In some configurations, the humidifier comprises a first portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000, the flow generator comprises a second portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000, and both portable display units are removable and portable.

[00943] In some configurations, the humidifier 300, 1302b and the flow generator 11, 1301b are in a common housing.

[00944] In some configurations, the humidifier comprises a heater plate 140 that is attached to the common housing and a humidification chamber 300 that can be removably positioned within a portion of the common housing such that the heater plate is in thermal communication with the heater plate. In some configurations, the heater plate 140 contacts the humidification chamber 300 when the humification chamber is in the common housing.

[00945] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be separable and removably couplable to the common housing.

[00946] Any of the breathing assistance apparatuses described herein may comprise more than one display. As shown in Figure 48 for example, a base unit 50 of an exemplary breathing assistance apparatus may have a first display screen 212 fixed to the housing 100 of the base unit. The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may also be provided for use with that breathing assistance apparatus. When the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is provided, that portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may act as the primary screen for the breathing assistance apparatus with the display screen 212 acting as a secondary or backup screen. That is, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be the primary interface for the breathing assistance apparatus, and the display screen 212 may be the secondary interface for the breathing assistance apparatus. In alternative configurations, the portable display unit may act as the primary screen for the breathing assistance apparatus with the display screen 212 also acting as the primary screen. In these configurations, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 and the display screen 212 may mirror each other, or otherwise allow the same functionality relating to monitoring of therapy and adjustment of therapy parameters.

[00947] In an alternative configuration, the display screen 212 may also be removable from the base unit and portable.

[00948] By providing at least one portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000, it is possible to provide a screen for use with a breathing assistance apparatus that enables optimal placement of the screen for use (e.g., at or near eye level of the patient, user, or medical personnel), while enabling the breathing assistance apparatus base unit to be positioned elsewhere.

[00949] In at least some exemplary configurations, a portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 for a breathing assistance apparatus is disclosed, wherein the portable display unit can be, or is configured to be, positioned in an operative position that is separate from a base unit of the breathing assistance apparatus and vertically higher than the base unit.

[00950] For example, when the breathing assistance apparatus comprises an integrated humidifier or is a humidifier, the humidifier can be positioned below the patient while the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 can be, or is configured to be, positioned in the operative position at a higher location that vertically higher than/above the base unit 50 and humidifier that is readily viewable/usable. This enables user interaction and control of the breathing assistance apparatus from an advantageous position.

[00951] The base unit 50 may comprise an integrated flow generator/blower and an integrated humidifier. [00952] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a breathing circuit in fluid communication with the humidifier and the breathing circuit comprising a patient interface. The humidifier can be, or is configured to be, placed below patient head height. The breathing circuit and humidifier are configured such that any condensate that accumulates in the breathing circuit will be encouraged to return to the humidifier rather than collecting at the patient interface. Gravity will assist with returning the condensate to the humidifier. Additionally, if the humidifier humidification chamber is overfilled, the overfilled liquid should not collect at the patient interface.

[00953] In some configurations, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 can be positioned above the base unit 50 and the humidifier.

[00954] In some configurations, when the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is above the base unit 50 and/or the humidifier, the portable display unit enables user interaction and control of the breathing assistance apparatus from an advantageous position.

[00955] In some configurations, the humidifier may be, or is configured to be, placed under patient hip height in order to let condensate drain into the humidification chamber.

[00956] The humidifier or high flow apparatus, at least when used in a hospital environment, are positioned below the patient's bed or clinician's hip due to the volume of water and the heater plate. This is for safety of the clinician and patient. This reduces the chance of spilling heated and/or contaminated water on the patient. However, this means an integrated screen may be out of visibility of the clinician. The portable display unit allows a clinician to detach the display unit and move it to a more visible position to allow a clinician to view the display from a convenient position while still keeping the base unit at a safe location.

[00957] In at least some exemplary configurations, a method of using a portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 of a breathing assistance apparatus is disclosed, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising a base unit 50 including a humidifier, the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 being tethered to the base unit, the method comprising the steps of: disconnecting the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 from the base unit, and positioning the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 above the base unit 50 such that the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 is visible to a user. [00958] In some configurations, the method comprises extending the tether or manipulating the tether to position the portable display unit in a location that is at eye level of the user or adjacent a patient.

[00959] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus comprises a humidifier.

[00960] In some configurations, the method comprises positioning the humidifier below patient head height and positioning the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 in the operative position so as to be readily viewable/usable.

[00961] In some configurations, the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a breathing circuit in fluid communication with the humidifier and the breathing circuit comprises a patient interface. When the humidifier is placed below patient head height, any condensate which accumulates in the breathing circuit is encouraged to return to the humidifier rather than collecting at the patient interface.

[00962] In some configurations, the method comprises placing the humidifier under patient hip height in order to let condensate drain into a humidification chamber of the humidifier.

[00963] In some configurations, the method comprises placing the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 above the base unit and the humidifier.

[00964] In some configurations, when the portable display unit 3000 is above the base unit and/or the humidifier, the display unit enables user interaction and control of the breathing assistance apparatus from an advantageous position.

[00965] When provided, the support features 3071, 3571, 4071 of the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000 enable the display units to be supported on and connected to a variety of different support surfaces or different support components. The support surfaces or support components will be separate from the base unit 50.

[00966] Figure 46 shows the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus connected or mounted to a support component comprising a medical pole MP supporting a liquid bag 301 delivering liquid to the humidifier humidification chamber 300. The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 can be supported on a transverse member MP' that extends from the medical pole, or can be supported on another support surface. The medical pole MP may be provided with one or more complementary connector features 2071, 2071' (see, for example, Figures 29 and 58) for engagement with the connector feature 3071, 3571, 4071 on the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00967] As another example, Figure 43 shows the portable display unit 3500 hanging on the end wall EW of a support component comprising a cot or bed whereas Figure 44 shows the portable display unit 3500 supported on a side wall SW of a support component comprising a bench and Figure 45 shows the portable display unit 3500 supported on a support component comprising a substantially horizontal support surface. The cot or bed, bench, or horizonal support surface may be provided with one or more complementary connector features 2071, 2071' for engagement with the connector feature 3071, 3571, 4071 on the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00968] As another example, Figure 47 shows exemplary support positions for the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 on a support component comprising a medical stand, including supporting the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 on a platform P, on a table T, or having the base unit mounted to a support arm and the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 connected to the base unit 50. Similar options are available for a warmer, an incubator, a bed mount, or other medical apparatuses. The medical stand may be provided with one or more complementary connector features 2071, 2071' for engagement with the connector feature 3071, 3571, 4071 on the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00969] As another example, Figure 49 shows the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 either connected to the base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus that is mounted to the medical pole MP, or connected to or supported on a transverse member that extends from the medical pole. The medical pole may be provided with one or more complementary connector features 2071, 2071' for engagement with the connector feature 3071, 3571, 4071 on the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[00970] The portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be angularly adjustable, rotatable, height-adjustable, and/or laterally selectively moveable when mounted to said support component. For example, the complementary connector feature(s) 2071, 2071' may be selectively moveable or adjustable relative to the support component, optionally while remaining connected to the support component.

[00971] Additionally, or alternatively the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 may be connected to a portion of the support component that is selectively moveable relative to another portion of the support component. For example, the portion of the support component may comprise an adjustable arm. [00972] The portable display unit 4000 may be tethered to the base unit 50 by a cable. In some configurations a breathing assistance apparatus is provided, the breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit 50; a portable display unit

4000 comprising: a display unit housing 4001; and a screen 4051; and a cable 4061 physically tethering the portable display unit 4000 with the base unit 50, wherein the cable 4061 is for communicating power to the portable display unit 4000 from the base unit 50 and/or for communicating data between the portable display unit 4000 and the base unit 50, wherein the cable 4061 is connected to the portable display unit 4000 by an overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable which removably connects to a portion of the display unit housing 4001 and/or is connected to the base unit 50 by a retention portion 4300 of the cable which removably connects to a portion of the base unit 50.

[00973] An exemplary configuration is shown in Figures 56 and 65-69.

[00974] In some configurations, the cable 4061 is connected to the portable display unit 4000 by the overmoulded portion 4200. In some configurations, the cable 4061 is connected to the base unit 50 by the retention portion 4300. In some configurations, the cable is both connected to the portable display unit 4000 by the overmoulded portion 4200 and to the base unit 50 by the retention portion 4300.

[00975] A shape of the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable conforms or corresponds to a shape of a slot 4008 in the portion of the display unit housing 4001.

[00976] Figures 65-67 show exemplary configurations of the overmoulded portion 4200 and the slot 4008.

[00977] The shape of the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable and the slot 4008 are such that the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable, and thereby the cable 4061, can only be inserted into the slot 4008 in the portion of the display unit housing

4001 in a single orientation. The cable 4061 may only be intended for use in a certain orientation. As such, the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable may act as polarisation feature so that a connector 4061a on the cable can only be inserted or plugged into the display unit housing 4001 in a single orientation.

[00978] The overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable comprises a shaped body portion 4201. The body portion has a shape that conforms or corresponds to the shape of the slot 4008.

[00979] In the exemplary configuration shown, the body portion 4201 comprises a base portion 4203 and an adjacent portion 4205. The base portion 4203 is proximal to the elongate portion of the cable that extends away from the display unit housing 4001 toward the base unit 50. The adjacent portion is proximal to the connector 4061a.

[00980] In the exemplary configuration shown, the slot 4008 comprises a complementary base portion 4008a and a complementary adjacent portion 4008b.

[00981] The body portion 4201 further comprises a cable sheath portion 4207 through which the cable passes.

[00982] The connector 4061a protrudes from a neck portion 4209 of the overmoulded portion 4200.

[00983] The overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable may comprise a groove 4211 for receipt of a seal or grommet to assist hermetically sealing against water and oxygen ingress into the display unit housing 4001. The seal may comprise an O-ring. The seal will seal against an aperture 4008c in the slot.

[00984] In an alternative configuration, a seal or grommet may be integrally moulded to the neck portion 4209 of the overmoulded portion 4200, in a similar position to that shown for the groove 4211.

[00985] The body portion 4201 is shaped to conform to the shape of the slot 4008 in the portion of the display unit housing. In the configuration shown, the base portion 4203 is thicker than the adjacent portion 4205. Other configurations are possible.

[00986] In the configuration shown, the base portion 4008a of the slot is deeper than the adjacent portion 4008b of the slot.

[00987] The outer surface(s) of the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable are advantageously shaped so that the overmoulded portion 4200 conforms to the external shape of the display unit housing 4001 adjacent to the slot 4008. The outer surface(s) may sit flush with the display unit housing adjacent the slot 4008.

[00988] As shown the cable 4061 extends through the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable such that the connector 4061a is oriented at a transverse angle relative to the cable 4061. In an alternative configuration, the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable may be configured such that the connector 4061a is aligned with the cable 4061. [00989] The connector 4061a of the cable 4061 extends through the aperture 4008c when the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable is inserted in the slot 4008.

[00990] The overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable is configured to be fastened to the display unit housing 4001 by one or more fasteners to inhibit removal of the cable 4061 from the portable display unit 4000. In the configuration shown, the body portion 4201 comprises one or more fastener receiving apertures 4213 for receipt of fasteners such as screws or the like. The fastener(s) extend through the fastener receiving aperture(s) 4213 and are received in complementary aperture(s) 4008d in the slot 4008 of the display unit housing 4001.

[00991] In an alternative configuration, the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable may be configured to be fastened to the display unit housing 4001 by one or more integral clip features, adhesive, or any other suitable technique.

[00992] By fastening the overmoulded portion 4200 of the cable to the display unit housing 4001, the connector 4061a is inhibited from being pulled out of the display unit housing or damaged if the cable 4061 is snagged.

[00993] The overmoulded 4200 of the cable provides a hermetic seal against water and oxygen ingress at the connection of the cable 4061 to the portable display unit 4000.

[00994] The cable 4061 may be removable from the portable display unit 4000 by removing the fastener(s).

[00995] In some configurations, the cable 4061 is connected to the base unit 50 by the retention portion 4300.

[00996] An exemplary configuration is shown in Figures 68 and 69.

[00997] A shape of the retention portion 4300 of the cable conforms or corresponds to a shape of a slot in the base unit 50. In the exemplary configuration shown in Figure 69, the retention portion 4300 of the cable comprises a body portion 4301 with one or more projections 4303 configured to be received in the slot in the base unit 50.

[00998] The retention portion 4300 of the cable may also be configured to be received in a slot 4061b in the cable 4061. [00999] The retention portion 4300 may be a separate component from the cable 4061 or may be integrally formed with the cable 4061. The retention portion 4300 may be an overmoulded portion of the cable 4061.

[OO1OOO] The retention portion 4300 of the cable is configured to be fastened to the base unit 50 by one or more fasteners to inhibit removal of the cable 4061 from the base unit 50. In the configuration shown, the body portion 4301 comprises one or more fastener receiving apertures 4305 for receipt of fasteners such as screws or the like. The fastener(s) extend through the fastener receiving aperture(s) 4305 and is/are received in complementary aperture(s) in the base unit 50.

[001001] In an alternative configuration, the retention portion 4300 of the cable may be configured to be fastened to the base unit 50 by one or more integral clip features.

[001002] In an alternative configuration, the retention portion 4300 may be configured to be fastened to the base unit 50 by way of the display unit mounting 2072 to the base unit 50. The fastening of the display unit mounting 2072 to the base unit may prevent the cable from being removed from the base unit 50.

[001003] By fastening the retention portion 4300 of the cable to the base unit 50, the connector 4061c is inhibited from being pulled out of the base unit 50 or damaged if the cable 4061 is snagged.

[001004] The cable 4061 may be removable from the base unit 50 by removing the fastener(s).

[001005] The shape of the retention portion 4300 of the cable may be such that the cable 4061 can only be inserted into the base unit 50 in a single orientation. In some configurations, the shape of the retention portion 4300 of the cable and the cable 4061 are such that the cable 4061 can only be inserted into the base unit 50 in a single orientation. For example, the retention portion 4300 may be configured to only fit with one side of the cable, so that if the cable is inverted the retention portion cannot engage with the cable. Additionally or alternatively, the retention portion 4300 of the cable, the cable 4061, and/or the base unit 50 may have one or more other features to ensure the cable can only be inserted into the base unit on a single orientation. As such, the retention portion of the cable may act as polarisation feature so that a connector 4061c on the cable can only be inserted or plugged into the cable connector 271b on the interconnect circuit board 271 in a single orientation. [001006] The breathing assistance apparatus may further comprise a sealing feature 4310 that provides a hermetic seal against water and/or oxygen ingress at the connection of the cable 4061 to the base unit 50.

[001007] In some configurations, the sealing feature 4310 comprises a seal or a gasket. In the configuration shown, the sealing feature 4310 comprises a grommet.

[001008] The grommet may be inserted onto the cable 4061 or may be integrally moulded or otherwise pre-assembled onto the cable 4061.

[001009] The grommet seals against a portion of the housing of the base unit 50.

[001010] The grommet may comprise silicone or any other suitable material.

[001011] The sealing feature 4310 may be integral with the retention portion 4300, separate from the retention portion 4300, or both integral with the retention portion 4300 and separate from the retention portion 4300 (i.e. may have a portion that is integrally formed with the retention portion 4300 and may have a portion that is separate from the retention portion 4300).

[001012] The cable 4061 may be configured to be connected to the upper housing chassis 102 or alternatively to a different part of the housing 100 of the base unit 50.

[001013] As outlined above, the cable may have a length of up to about 2m, optionally of between about 1.5m and about 2m.

[001014] The cable 4061 can be replaceable if the display unit 4000 or cable 4061 gets damaged. Replacement of the cable 4061 may be carried out on-site by a service technician.

[001015] If the cable 3061, 3561, 4061 is separable from or provided separately from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000, the portable display unit tethering component TCI may comprise a connector for connecting the cable 3061, 3561, 4061 to the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000.

[001016] If the cable 3061, 3561, 4061 is separable from, or provided separately from, the base unit 50, the base unit 50 may comprise a connector for connecting the cable 3061, 3561, 4061 to the base unit 50.

[001017] The breathing assistance apparatus may comprise at least one security feature to only allow connection of a genuine portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 to the base unit 50. [001018] The at least one security feature may be provided at least partly by the connection of the cable 4061 to the portable display unit 4000 and/or at the connection of the cable 4061 to the base unit 50.

[001019] The at least one security feature may comprise a hardware and/or software module to determine whether the connected portable display unit 4000 is genuine.

[001020] The at least one security feature may include a separate security chip (i.e., a separate hardware module) or may be integrated into the interconnect PCB 271, or base unit main base unit circuit board 272.

[001021] The at least one security feature may comprise a software module that checks the incoming connection to the portable display unit 4000 and is able to determine if the portable display unit 4000 is allowed for use (i.e., is not a third-party portable display unit). If the portable display unit 4000 is not legitimate, then the base unit 50 may not allow data and power connections to the portable display unit 4000, and/or may alert the user, and/or may alert the manufacturer or supplier.

[001022] The alert to the user may be through the display unit notification light 4150, 4150', the base unit notification light 240, 240', and/or the speaker S.

[001023] Additionally, or alternatively, the connection may be encrypted, such that the base unit 50 will only work with cables 4061 and/or portable display units 4000 which have corresponding encryption. The portable display unit 4000 may have an encryption key that enables access to portable display unit or vice versa. This similarly prevents the use of third party screen modules.

[001024] In one exemplary configuration one of the base unit 50, cable 4061, or portable display unit 4000 has a chip or integrated circuit that issues a series of numbers, and another one of the base unit 50, cable, or portable display unit 4061 has a chip or integrated circuit that checks the numbers for a match.

[001025] In some configurations, the hardware and/or software module is provided by a security circuit.

[001026] In some configurations, the security circuit comprises one or more encryption modules which allow an encrypted connection to be established through the cable if the portable display unit is genuine. [001027] The base unit 50 may comprise a cable management arrangement to enable the cable 3061, 3561, 4061 to be coiled. The cable management arrangement may further allow other cables to be coiled, such as a power cable for the base unit, cables for one or more sensors, etc.

[001028] The cable management arrangement may comprise a cable hanger. The cable hanger enables the cable to be hung from the cable hanger. The cable hanger allows the cable 4061 to be coiled about the cable hanger. As a non-limiting example, the cable management arrangement may include or may be the retaining structure 9614 of the configuration shown in Figure 123 to be described below.

[001029] The cable hanger projects from a portion of the housing 100 of the base unit.

[001030] In an advantageous configuration, the cable hanger projects from a portion of the housing 100 so that the cable hanger and the cable 4061 do not interfere with access to the humidification chamber bay 108 or portable display unit 4000 when the portable display unit 4000 is connected to the base unit 50.

[001031] In some configurations, the cable hanger projects from a side and/or the rear of the base unit housing 100.

[001032] The cable hanger may comprise a main support portion and a retainer portion to assist with retaining the cable 4061 on the main support portion. The retainer portion may be an enlarged portion having at least one dimension larger than the main support portion. In one configuration, the retainer portion comprises a flange.

[001033] As outlined above, the cable 4061 may be retractable. For example, the cable 4061 may be retractable at the portable display unit 4000 or at the base unit 50.

[001034] Any of the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000 may have direct communications capability, i.e., not to or from the base unit 50. The direct communications capability may be wired or wireless, and may be any of the types described herein. The direct communications enable communications to and/or from the portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 directly, without transmitting back to the base unit 50 first.

[001035] For example, the direct communications capability might be via a nurse alarm cable that plugs into a hospital nurse alarm port, or the portable display unit may have Wi-Fi and/or a Bluetooth integrated circuit and/or a cellular communications integrated circuit for connecting to an external device. Exemplary external devices include a smartphone, laptop, tablet, desktop computer, or other medical devices.

[001036] The portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000 described herein may be used while connected to the base units 50 or while disconnected from the base units 50. In some configurations, the portable display units may be used while connected to the different support component, e.g., a medical pole or medical stand, but may be connected to the base unit for use during transport to, from, or around a medical facility or when not being used for monitoring a patient.

[001037] The features are described with reference to a breathing assistance apparatus that can deliver heated and humidified gases to a patient or user. The apparatus may be suitable for treating chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD). The apparatus may be configured to deliver gases to a patient interface at a high flow rate (high flow therapy), particularly nasal high flow therapy.

[001038] Alternatively, the features may be used with an apparatus for a different purpose. The apparatus may be a high flow therapy apparatus, or may be a low flow therapy apparatus. For example, the features may be provided in an apparatus for providing continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP), which may deliver gases (humidified or otherwise) at lower flow rates or may be provided in a medical insufflation apparatus.

[001039] The features may be used with a nasal high flow (NHF) apparatus.

[001040] The features could be used with a stand-alone humidifier. The standalone humidifier may have a housing, a recess 108 for receipt of the humidification chamber 300, and a heater plate 140, but may not have a motor unit. The standalone humidifier may receive gases from an external source.

[001041] Accordingly, an alternative form breathing assistance apparatus 10 may be a standalone humidifier apparatus comprising a base unit 50 defining a main housing and a humidifier 12.

[001042] The standalone humidifier apparatus can deliver heated and humidified gases for various medical procedures, including respiratory therapy, laparoscopy, and the like. These apparatuses can be configured to control temperature and/or humidity. The apparatuses can also include medical circuits comprising various components that can be used to transport heated and/or humidified gases to and/or from patients. For example, in some breathing circuits, gases inhaled by a patient are delivered from a heater-humidifier through an inspiratory tube or conduit. As another example, tubes can deliver humidified gas (commonly CO2) into the abdominal cavity in insufflation circuits. This can help prevent desiccation or 'drying out' of the patient's internal organs, and can decrease the amount of time needed for recovery from surgery. Heater wires may extend inside of at least a portion of the tubing forming the circuit to prevent or at least reduce the likelihood of the formation of significant condensation.

[001043] A standalone humidifier apparatus would typically include a base unit 50 and a humidification chamber 300. The base unit 50 can comprise a heater plate 140. The humidification chamber 300 can be configured to hold a volume of a liquid, such as water. The heater plate can be configured to heat the volume of liquid held within the humidification chamber 300 to produce vapour.

[001044] The humidification chamber 300 is removable from the base unit to allow the humidification chamber to be more readily sterilized or disposed, or to re-fill the chamber with liquid. The body of the humidification chamber 300 can be formed from a non-conductive glass or plastics material but the humidification chamber can also include conductive components. For instance, the humidification chamber can include a highly heat-conductive base (for example, an aluminium base) contacting or associated with the heater plate on the heater base.

[001045] The base unit can also include electronic controls such as a master controller. In response to user-set humidity or temperature values input via a user interface and other inputs, the master controller determines when (or to what level) to energize the heater plate 140 to heat the liquid within the humidification chamber 300.

[001046] The standalone humidifier apparatus can include a flow generator to deliver gases to the humidification chamber. In some configurations, the flow generator can comprise a ventilator, blower, or any other suitable source of pressurized gases suitable for breathing or use in medical procedures. The flow generator may be positioned in the base unit 50.

[001047] Alternatively, the standalone humidifier apparatus may comprise just the base unit 50 and the humidification chamber 300, and may be used with a separate or remote flow generator. The base unit 50 may be configured to fluidly connect to the separate or remote flow generator.

[001048] Therefore, the flow generator that is used with a standalone humidifier apparatus may be a wall gases source, ventilator, blower, or gas tank for example. [001049] A standalone humidifier apparatus can be used with breathing therapies, positive pressure apparatus, non-invasive ventilation, surgical procedures including but not limited to laparoscopy, and the like. Desirably, the humidifier apparatus can be adapted to supply humidity or vapour to a supply of gases. The humidifier apparatus can be used with continuous, variable, or bi-level PAP systems or other form of respiratory therapy. In some configurations, the humidifier apparatus can be integrated into a system that delivers any such types of therapy.

[001050] An exemplary standalone humidifier apparatus is described in WO 2015/038013. The contents of that specification are incorporated herein in their entirety by way of reference.

[001051] The standalone humidifier apparatus may have any one or more of the features described or shown herein.

[001052] The present disclosure further provides for the following features or configurations. As non-limiting examples, description of the features below is made with reference to the base unit 50 described herein, e.g., in the context of Figures 58 to 72. However, it should be appreciated that one or more of the features described herein below may be used or provided with other base units or breathing assistance apparatus described herein, or any other suitable base units or breathing assistance apparatus.

[001053] It should be appreciated that one or more of the features described herein below may be used or provided with a display unit, including a portable display unit (e.g., including any one of the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000).

[001054] Further, it should be appreciated that one or more of the features described herein below may be employed on their own or in any combinations thereof.

[001055] Further, it should be appreciated that one or more of the features described herein below may be employed in combination with one or more features described herein above in the "Breathing assistance apparatus", "Portable display unit", and "Base unit" sections above.

[001056] One or more of the following features may provide one or more of: (i) improved screen visibility, (ii) increased overall display size of a graphical user interface (GUI), (iii) improved user controls interaction and usability, (iv) improved alarm feedback, and (v) adaptability or future proofing of new functionality/functionalities and therapy/therapies. [001057] As a non-limiting example of improving screen visibility, one or more of the features described herein below may allow a user to place a portable display unit (and relevant device controls) at a position or location that is appropriate for the situation, helping to improve the monitoring of the device and patient parameters. This may lead to users knowing the device and patient status more rapidly and easily to help ensure patients are receiving the appropriate or correct therapy. The portable display unit may be placed on a (medical) pole at eye level or at a height which the user chooses, on a movable arm (e.g., attached to a patient bed, infant warmer or incubator), on top of a mattress of an infant warmer, on a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus, or on a flat surface (e.g., a table or bed).

[001058] In some configurations, with an increased display size of the GUI, more settings and/or measured values may be added or shown to a user as appropriate. Further, more obvious differentiation between measured and set values may be achieved.

[001059] Further, the GUI may enable more complicated (display) modes with large numbers of settings and measured values to be displayed to a user. The GUI may also enable more complex transitions between display modes.

[001060] Further, the GUI may enable viewing of parameter setting (and/or device settings) from greater distances and/or from different positions (or directions), e.g., due to a change in viewing or display unit angle.

[001061] Further, the character size (including font size) and features displayed on the GUI may be enlarged for viewing at greater distances away from the GUI.

[001062] For improving user controls interaction and usability, a dial for changing settings may be provided as an additional or alternative way to change device settings and/or navigate the menu.

[001063] Having a dial for changing settings may enable faster manipulation of settings when required in specific clinical situations.

[001064] There may be improved screen use in different environments. A resistive screen technology may be employed in the (portable) display unit to enable changes in settings even when there may be fluids present on the screen.

[001065] Alarm feedback to a user may be improved by increasing the visibility of visual alarm(s) in specific use scenarios. External

[001066] The disclosure further provides for external sampling ports (e.g., external pressure ports) which may be employed with any of the breathing assistance apparatuses (or the base units thereof) described herein, including those described in the "Breathing assistance apparatus" and "Base unit" sections above.

[001067] A sampling port may connect with a sampling line. The sampling port may receive the sampling line or may be received by the sampling line.

[001068] A sampling port may be or may include a male-type connector or a female-type connector.

[001069] The sampling ports may be pressure ports that may be used for the purpose of sensing pressure, and may be used for connecting with pressure lines, which, in turn, may be connected to a patient interface (e.g., mask). These pressure ports may be in the form of pressure prongs, as part of pressure units (or pressure pucks), and/or as part of pressure orifice, as will be described below.

[001070] While the description below relates to pressure ports as non-limiting examples, it should be appreciated that other suitable sampling ports may be provided, for example, for connecting with sampling lines (including, for example, gases sampling lines) for the purpose of sensing one or more other parameters such as flow rate, end tidal CO2 (EtCC ), electrocardiogram (ECG) signals, etc. A gases sampling line may convey a gases flow from a patient (or patient interface) to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[001071] A pressure port, as one form of a sampling port, relates to a component located on the exterior of a device (e.g., a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus) that receives or connects to a pressure line(s) that samples gases at the patient interface (e.g., mask or nasal cannula) end of the system, and feeds the gases back to the device where a pressure sensor is. This arrangement has the advantage of enabling pressure to be directly measured at the patient interface end of the system, rather than just being estimated, e.g., based on readings of pressure taken inside the device, which may be subject to various inaccuracies. Further, such an arrangement may obviate the need for a pressure sensor to be positioned near the patient or even at/in the patient interface, which may be inconvenient to use and/or may complicate set up of the device and interface with a patient) and/or may increase the cost of consumable medical equipment components if the sensor is integrated with the patient interface or patient interface end of a breathing conduit. [001072] Usually, there is no pressure sensor at or proximate the patient interface (e.g., mask or nasal cannula). Rather, patient interface pressure is often estimated based on the flow rate and pressure measured at the base unit and known relationships between these two parameters and, optionally, known properties of the flow path (i.e., the flow path pneumatic conductance or resistance). With knowledge of both flow rate and pressure (and optionally the flow path pneumatic conductance or resistance), a controller associated with the base unit can estimate the pressure drop along the breathing conduit and then determine the patient interface or patient interface end pressure by subtracting this pressure drop from the measured or estimated pressure output by the base unit. The advantage of having an actual (as opposed to estimated) pressure reading at the mask is that the exact pressure the patient is experiencing can be detected directly or determined with minimal further calculations. In the case of, for example, infants or neonates, even a small pressure change can be significant and it is therefore important to have the pressure reading be as accurate as possible.

[001073] Pressure is important for numerous types of respiratory therapies. One non-limiting example where pressure ports may be used is in resuscitating an infant using selective occlusion of an aperture in a T-piece (this may be referred to as T-piece resuscitation therapy). Other therapies (e.g., for adults and children) may also use pressure readings, e.g., bubble continuous positive airway pressure (BCPAP) therapy, variable-flow continuous positive airway pressure (VFCPAP) therapy, nasal high flow (NHF) therapy, non-invasive ventilation (NIV) therapy or bi-level positive airway pressure therapy, continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP) therapy, and non- invasive positive pressure ventilation (NIPPV). Different therapies may require different numbers of pressure ports.

[001074] The number of sampling ports required may depend on the therapy type or mode to be administered. The number of sampling ports required may be one, two, three, or any higher number, or none at all. The number of sampling ports may be configurable as will be described below using the non-limiting examples of pressure ports.

[001075] Depending on the therapy type being administered, one or two (or more, potentially) pressure ports - or none - may be required. For example, for resuscitation mode, two pressure lines are typically required. The various pressure ports described herein may be adaptable or configurable such that the number of (active) pressure ports (i.e., pressure ports that are required to be connected to pressure lines during a therapy) can be changed. The number of pressure ports may be varied. Thus, the breathing assistance apparatus may not necessarily always have pressure ports in use. [001076] As one non-limiting example, an exemplary breathing assistance apparatus may have two sampling ports, for example, so that the breathing assistance apparatus is suitable for resuscitation therapy/resuscitation mode (as described above, two sampling lines are required for resuscitation). Optionally, if not required, one or both of the sampling ports may be able to be occluded, for example, by a cover or shroud covering them (e.g., to prevent water or dust ingress/collection), or potentially by folding one port down. The sampling ports may be pressure ports, e.g., pressure prongs.

[001077] As another non-limiting example, one or more pressure ports may be provided as removable inserts. For example, the base unit may include one or more connector ports, and the required pressure ports may be removably connected to or engaged with respective connector ports. As further examples, there may be one covering with a single embedded pressure port, another covering with two pressure ports, and a third covering with no pressure ports. The coverings may be switched out or exchanged when changing therapy type.

[001078] One or more of the pressure ports may be used with a breathing assistance apparatus where a portable display unit that is removably connectable to the breathing assistance apparatus may be employed. The pressure port(s) may be positioned or oriented or configured such that the port(s) do not interfere with the portable display unit or the screen thereof when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit of the breathing assistance apparatus, and the port(s) should also be readily accessible for connection of the pressure line(s). In other words, the pressure port(s) may be configured to, when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be both readily accessible to a user and positioned so as to minimise interference with the portable display unit or the screen of the portable display unit. Preferably, the pressure ports are located on/in an upper surface of the base unit housing. The portable display unit may be as described herein, including any of the embodiments and configurations described in the "Portable display unit" section above.

[001079] The pressure ports may allow for one or more of the following: (i) improved pressure control, (ii) ability to add synchronised NIPPV therapy, (iii) improved pressure accuracy (e.g., ±0.5 cm), (iv) improved ability to detect inspiratory limb condensate (and alarm), (v) improved alarms, (vi) improved safety, (vii) improved bubbling alarm, (viii) improved respiratory rate (RR) detection in neonates (e.g., in CPAP, NIPPV and BCPAP modes). [001080] The pressure ports enable access to direct, more accurate pressure samples that allow the breathing assistance apparatus to more tightly or quickly adjust/control pressure, use readings for breath-synchronised pressure adjustments (i.e., as part of NIPPV), and/or calculate more accurate patient parameters (such as respiratory rate).

[001081] The improved ability to detect inspiratory limb condensate is helpful as the presence of moisture/condensate in the tubing may affect the pressure measurements in a characteristic fashion, or could cause subtle fluctuations in pressure that might be detectable in pressure readings.

[001082] In some configurations, the pressure ports may be in the form of protruding prongs (e.g., for sampling of gases via a remote gases sampling line) that may be used with a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus. The breathing assistance apparatus may include or be used with at least one of (i) a portable display unit (i.e., a removable display screen that can be docked and undocked from the base unit), (ii) a humidifier, or (iii) a blower or flow generator that provides or generates a flow of gases.

[001083] One or more pressure prongs may protrude from a surface of the base unit, for example, in a location that (i) may not interfere with or may minimise interference with the portable display unit, and (ii) allows the prong(s) to be easily accessible when the portable display unit is in place or connected to the base unit, to allow the pressure line(s) to be connected with the prong(s).

[001084] Figure 73 shows a schematic view of a base unit 50 with a pressure port 4600 in the form of a pressure prong. The pressure prong 4600 connects with a pressure line 4602 that in turn connects with a patient interface 4604. A breathing conduit 4694 is also connected to the patient interface 4604 to convey gases flow from the base unit 50 to the patient interface 4604. The patient interface 4604 and the breathing conduit 4694 together define a breathing circuit.

[001085] A recess or cavity 4608 may be defined in the base unit 50. The recess 4608 may be defined in a housing of the base unit 50.

[001086] A covering 4606 may be provided or used to cover the recess 4608. The recess 4608 may be coverable via the covering 4606 or another lid, in use. [001087] The pressure prong 4600 may extend from the covering 4606. The pressure prong 4600 may extend through the covering. The pressure prong 4600 may extend partially through the covering 4606 into or from the recess 4608.

[001088] The covering 4606 and/or the pressure prong 4600 may be removable from the base unit 50.

[001089] The recess 4608 may receive or house an electrical circuit to operatively communicate with the pressure prong 4600. The electrical circuit may include a printed circuit board (PCB) 4610.

[001090] The PCB 4610 may be a dedicated PCB. For example, the PCB 4610 may be dedicated to sensing (e.g., pressure sensing). In other words, the PCB 4610 may be populated with components - for example, sensors, sensor circuits, controllers - that are solely intended for performing sensing.

[001091] The PCB 4610 may be a daughterboard PCB configured to communicate with a main PCB of the base unit 50.

[001092] The electrical circuit may further include a sensor arrangement comprising at least one sensor 4612. The at least one sensor 4612 may be provided on the PCB 4610.

[001093] The electrical circuit may be removable from the recess 4608. At least the PCB 4610 and the sensor 4612 may be removable from the recess 4608.

[001094] The pressure prong 4600 may be arranged to operatively communicate with the at least one sensor 4612.

[001095] The pressure prong 4600 may be arranged abutting the at least one sensor 4612.

[001096] The at least one sensor 4612 may include one or more pressure sensors. In this way, one or more pressure sensors may be provided at the device end (i.e., at the base unit 50), so that pressure lines may be employed to divert sampled gas back to the pressure sensor(s) at the base unit 50.

[001097] One or more pressure prong(s) 4600 may be coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit 50. The pressure prong(s) 4600 may be located or oriented in various different configurations or arrangements. The prong(s) 4600 may be oriented differently, e.g., facing off to the side of the base unit 50, and/or extending non-vertically with or from the recess 4608 within which the prong(s) 4600 may be located. As non-limiting examples, the pressure prong(s) 4600 may be oriented to extend horizontally or partially horizontally (i.e., at some angle from a horizontal plane) relative to a vertical axis extending through the base unit 50, or the pressure prong(s) 4600 may extend along/at an angle from a horizontal plane defined by the base unit upper housing surface.

[001098] Figures 74 to 77 show perspective views of breathing assistance apparatus base units 50 with different arrangements of pressure ports, e.g., in the form of pressure prongs 4700, 4701. While two pressure prongs 4700, 4701 are shown, it should be appreciated that the number of pressure prongs 4700, 4701 may be varied.

[001099] The base unit 50 includes a main housing 100, a humidification chamber bay 108 for receipt of a removable humidification chamber (e.g., 300, Figure 14) to define a humidifier, and a humidified gas inlet port 340 as part of the humidifier. The base unit 50 further includes a connection feature 2071. A breathing conduit or inspiratory conduit 16 is shown connected to the base unit 50.

[OO11OO] As shown in Figure 74, the prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged coming up or extending substantially vertically through the screen carrier and shroud of the base unit 50 on the right-hand side of the base unit 50 next to where the breathing conduit 16 is connected to the base unit 50.

[OO11O1] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged substantially vertically or may be on a different angle, for example, between 0° and 45° from a vertical axis extending through the base unit 50.

[001102] Alternatively, the prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged coming up through or extending substantially vertically from the screen carrier and shroud of the base unit 50 on the left-hand side of the base unit 50 opposite to the side where the breathing conduit 16 is connected to the base unit 50.

[001103] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged substantially vertically or may be on a different angle, for example, between 0° and 45° from a vertical axis extending through the base unit 50.

[001104] As shown in Figure 75, the prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged coming or extending outward from the screen carrier of the base unit 50 on the right-hand side of the base unit 50, where part of the prongs 4700, 4701 may be located below the screen carrier [001105] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged substantially horizontally or may be on a different angle, for example, between 0° and 45° from a horizontal axis extending through the base unit 50.

[001106] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be oriented to the right (or extending rightward when the base unit 50 is viewed from the front, e.g., perpendicular relative to a right-side wall of the base unit 50) or may be oriented differently, for example, extending rightward but at an angle towards the front or rear of the base unit 50.

[001107] Alternatively, the prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged coming out of or extending out from the screen carrier of the base unit 50 on the left-hand side of the base unit 50, where part of the prongs 4700, 4701 may be located below the screen carrier. The prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged horizontally or may be on a different angle.

[001108] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be oriented to the left (or extending leftward when the base unit 50 is viewed from the front, e.g., perpendicular relative to a left-side wall of the base unit 50) or may be oriented differently, for example, extending leftward but at an angle towards the front or rear of the base unit 50.

[001109] As shown in Figure 76, the prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged coming out of or extending out from the screen carrier of the base unit 50 on the right-hand side of the base unit 50 next to where the breathing conduit 16 is connected to the base unit 50.

[OO111O] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged substantially horizontally or may be on a different angle, for example, between 0° and 45° from a horizontal axis extending through the base unit 50.

[OOllll] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be oriented forward towards the front of the base unit 50 or may be oriented differently, for example, extending forward but at an angle towards the right-side or the left-side of the base unit 50.

[001112] As shown in Figure 77, the prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged coming out of or extending out from the screen carrier of the base unit 50 on the left-hand side of the base unit 50, opposite to the side where the breathing conduit 16 is connected to the base unit 50.

[001113] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be arranged substantially horizontally or may be on a different angle, for example, between 0° and 45° from a horizontal axis extending through the base unit 50. [001114] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be oriented forward towards the front of the base unit 50or may be oriented differently, for example, extending forward but at an angle towards the right-side or the left-side of the base unit 50.

[001115] The prongs 4700, 4701 may be selectively coverable, for example, with covers. This may depend on the type of therapy to be or being administered.

[001116] As described with reference to Figure 73, the base unit 50 may have a recess/cavity 4608. The recess 4608 may be dedicated to receiving the prongs 4600, 4700, 4701. The recess 4608 may be dedicated to receive an electrical circuit, e.g., the PCB 4610 and sensor arrangement having at least one sensor 4612. The recess 4608 may be concealed in use, such as via a covering 4606 that seals the recess 4608 off while allowing the prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 to still protrude from the housing of the base unit 50. The covering 4606 may be used in conjunction with an O-ring, e.g., to seal the recess 4608 (and the PCB 4610) from the external environment, protecting the electrical circuitry from water spills and/or ingress.

[001117] The PCB 4610 may be insertable in the recess 4608, as mentioned above. The PCB 4610 may be an entirely separate PCB, or it may be the abovedescribed daughterboard PCB that connects a tethering cable or screen cable to a portable display unit. On the PCB 4610, there may be one or more sensors 4612 configured to contact or operatively communicate with the one or more pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 on or attached to the base unit 50 (and the pressure lines if/when the pressure lines are connected to the prongs 4600, 4700, 4701). In this way, the pressure of the gases flowing in the pressure line(s) may be convertible to a pressure reading, e.g., the pressure can be detected by one or more sensors 4612 and then read by a controller connected to the PCB 4610. As a non-limiting example, a respective sensor 4612 may be associated with a single respective pressure prong 4600, 4700, 4701. Nevertheless, other configurations may be possible, for example, a respective sensor 4612 being associated with a plurality of pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701, or a plurality of respective sensors 4612 being associated with a respective pressure prong 4600, 4700, 4701.

[001118] It should be appreciated that one or more of the pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 may be integrated with the base unit 50, or may be inserts that are removably couplable to the base unit 50.

[001119] Different therapies may require a different number of prongs in use, and there may be therapies that require none at all. As a non-limiting example, there may be two pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 by default. One or both of the pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 may be selectively coverable by a suitable cover/lid/shroud if they are not to be used. Additionally, or alternatively, the pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 may be rotatable and/or foldable and/or removable (if the pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 are inserts) if not in use.

[001120] Further, in some configurations, there may be several exchangeable prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 (or other sampling ports or pressure ports), each integrated with a covering/lid (e.g., covering 4606, Figure 73). So, there may be a covering/lid with a single prong embedded, another covering/lid with two prongs embedded, and a third covering/lid with no prongs. In this way, depending on the therapy to be administered, coverings with different numbers of pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 may be switched out and the cavity 4608 sealed in use.

[001121] Accordingly, it should be appreciated that the number of the sampling port(s) arranged to connect with corresponding sampling lines for a therapy session for a patient may be selectively configurable according to a breathing therapy mode to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus corresponding to the therapy session. The sampling port(s) to be used to connect with corresponding sampling line(s) for the therapy session may be defined as "active" sampling port(s).

[001122] In some configurations, the present disclosure may provide a breathing assistance apparatus including a base unit 50 configured to provide a flow of gases, a humidifier for humidifying the flow of gases, and at least one sampling port (e.g., pressure prong 4600, 4700, 4701) coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit 50, the at least one sampling port being configured to connect with a sampling line (e.g., pressure line 4602) associated with a patient (or associated with a patient interface or breathing circuit of a patient), wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to, when a portable display unit (e.g., portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000) is connected to the base unit 50, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

[001123] The humidifier may include a humidification chamber configured to receive a liquid (e.g., water).

[001124] The humidifier may be integrated with the base unit 50, or may be a separate humidifier.

[001125] In some configurations, the present disclosure may provide a breathing assistance apparatus including a base unit 50, a portable display unit (e.g., portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000) configured to removably connect to the base unit 50, and at least one sampling port (e.g., pressure prong 4600, 4700, 4701) coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit 50, the at least one sampling port being configured to connect with a sampling line (e.g., pressure line 4602) associated with a patient, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to, when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit 50, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

[001126] In some configurations, the present disclosure may provide a breathing assistance apparatus including a base unit 50, and at least one sampling port (e.g., pressure prong 4600, 4700, 4701) coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit 50, the at least one sampling port being configured to connect with a sampling line (e.g., pressure line 4602) associated with a patient, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to, when a portable display unit (e.g., portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000) is connected to the base unit 50, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit, and wherein the breathing assistance apparatus is capable of providing at least one of a high flow therapy or a pressurebased therapy to the patient.

[001127] The sampling line disclosed herein may be associated with a patient interface (e.g., a mask); such as by being on or proximate the patient interface in use.

[001128] In some configurations, the at least one sampling port may be coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit 50 at a part of the base unit 50 and/or in an orientation allowing the at least one sampling port to be accessible and to minimise interference with the portable display unit (e.g., portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000) when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit 50.

[001129] The at least one sampling port may be pivotably and/or rotatably coupled to or configured to pivotably and/or rotatably couple to the base unit. This may allow the at least one sampling port to be suitably arranged or oriented for easy access and minimal interference with the portable display unit. This may also allow the at least one sampling port to be stored away when not in use.

[001130] The at least one sampling port may be foldable. For example, a sampling port may have a section that is movable relative to another section of the sampling port to allow folding of the sampling port. This may allow the at least one sampling port to be suitably arranged or oriented for easy access and minimal interference with the portable display unit. This may also allow the at least one sampling port to be stored away or folded down when not in use. [001131] In some configurations, the base unit 50 may include a connector port and the at least one sampling port may be removably coupled or engaged with the connector port. A lid may be provided to cover the connector port, e.g., when the connector port is not in use or the at least one sampling port is not engaged with or connected to the connector port.

[001132] A cover may be provided to cover or seal the end region of the at least one sampling port that is to connect with the sampling line, e.g., when the at least one sampling port is not in use.

[001133] In some configurations, the present disclosure may provide a breathing assistance apparatus including a base unit 50, a plurality of sampling ports (e.g., pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701) coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit 50, each sampling port of the plurality of sampling ports being configured to connect with a respective sampling line (e.g., pressure line 4602) associated with a patient, wherein a quantity or number of the plurality of sampling ports ("active" sampling port(s)) arranged to connect with corresponding sampling lines for a therapy session for the patient may be selectively configurable based on a breathing therapy mode to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus corresponding to the therapy session.

[001134] The plurality of sampling ports may be configured to, when a portable display unit (e.g., portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000) is connected to the base unit 50, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display.

[001135] At least one cover may be provided, where a respective cover of the at least one cover is configured to cover an end region of a respective sampling port of the plurality of sampling ports that is to be unused for (or during) the therapy session.

[001136] A recess (e.g., recess 4608) may be defined in the base unit 50 to receive the plurality of sampling ports. A covering (e.g., covering 4606) may be provided to cover the recess, e.g., to prevent water or dust ingress/collection. The covering may be removable.

[001137] In some configurations, the plurality of sampling ports may extend from the covering.

[001138] In some configurations, the covering may allow the plurality of sampling ports to extend through the covering. [001139] In some configurations, the covering may allow a subset of the plurality of sampling ports to extend through the covering.

[001140] Referring to a non-limiting example of two sensors on a PCB (e.g., PCB 4610) arranged within a recess (e.g., recess 4608), three different coverings — which may be exchangeable with each other — may be used. A first covering may allow both of the sampling ports to protrude through the covering (for connecting to two sampling lines and operatively communicate with two sensors), a second covering may allow one sampling port to protrude through the covering (for connecting to one sampling line and operatively communicate with one of two sensors; the other sensor being covered and not accessible), and a third covering that functions as a lid, sealing off all sensors (e.g., for therapies that may not or do not require sampling lines).

[001141] While a sampling port (e.g., pressure prong) may be arranged to operatively communicate directly or connect directly to a sensor on a PCB, without any tubing in-between, as shown in Figure 73 in relation to the pressure prong 4600 and the sensor 4612, there may be other approaches such as those shown in Figures 78 to 81. The sampling port (e.g., pressure prong) may be removable.

[001142] In some configurations, one or more intermediate connection components may be provided to enable communication between the sampling port and the sensor. The intermediate connection component(s) may include intermediate tube(s) and/or manifold(s).

[001143] As non-limiting examples, one or more intermediate tubes, e.g., flexible tube(s), may be provided for connection between the sampling port and the sensor. The intermediate tube(s) may be provided for ease of connection and guiding, rather than having the port directly abutting the sensor, as the sensor is located in a recess which might make it difficult to locate and connect the sampling line to the sensor. The intermediate tube(s) may form a last small stretch of pneumatic connection allowing, for example, sampled gases, to reach the sensor. A manifold may also be provided as an intermediate component.

[001144] The sampling port(s) may be connected to and disconnected from the intermediate tube(s) while the intermediate tube(s) may remain in place within a recess of the base unit.

[001145] Referring to Figure 78, a PCB 5110 having a sensor 5112 may be arranged within a recess 5108 of a base unit (e.g., base unit 50). A manifold 5150 may be arranged at least partially on the PCB 5110 and connected to the sensor 5112. [001146] A sampling port (e.g., pressure prong) 5100 may be coupled to the base unit. The sampling port 5100 may operatively communicate with the sensor 5112 via an intermediate tube 5152 and the manifold 5150 provided within the recess 5108. The intermediate tube 5152 may be of a length that allows the intermediate tube 5152 to extend out of the recess 5108.

[001147] A covering (or port cover) 5106 with common connection to the base unit may be provided.

[001148] The covering 5106 is a removable covering with the sampling port 5100 embedded in it.

[001149] The covering 5106 serves to cover the recess 5108. When the covering 5106 is arranged in place over the recess 5108, similar to the other coverings disclosed herein, the recess 5108 is sealed, but with the sampling port 5100 extending from the covering 5106. The sampling port 5100 is connected to the intermediate tube 5152 so as to form a pneumatic connection to the manifold 5150 and thereby the sensor 5112.

[001150] Referring to Figure 79, a PCB 5210 having a sensor 5212 may be arranged within a recess 5208 of a base unit (e.g., base unit 50). A sampling port (e.g., pressure prong) 5200 may be coupled to the base unit. The sampling port 5200 may operatively communicate with the sensor 5212 via an intermediate tube 5252 provided within the recess 5208. The intermediate tube 5252 may be of a length that allows the intermediate tube 5252 to extend out of the recess 5208.

[001151] Referring to Figure 80, a PCB 5310 having a sensor 5312 may be arranged within a recess 5308 of a base unit (e.g., base unit 50). A manifold 5350 may be arranged within the recess 5308 and connected to the sensor 5312 via an intermediate tube 5354.

[001152] The use of the intermediate tube 5354 allows flexibility of placement of the manifold 5350 which may be advantageous in terms of process assembly. For example, the manifold 5350 may be mounted to a housing of the base unit.

[001153] A sampling port (e.g., pressure prong) 5300 may be coupled to the base unit. The sampling port 5300 may operatively communicate with the sensor 5312 via an intermediate tube 5352, the manifold 5350, and the intermediate tube 5354. The intermediate tube 5352 may be of a length that allows the intermediate tube 5352 to extend out of the recess 5308. [001154] Figure 81 shows a PCB 5410 arranged within a recess 5408 of a base unit (e.g., base unit 50), and a covering (or port cover) 5406 with common connection to the base unit. While not shown, the PCB 5410 includes a sensor for communication with a sampling port. The covering 5406 may be removable. The covering 5406 may be as described in the context of the covering 5106 (Figure 78) except that there is no sampling port.

[001155] The covering 5406 entirely covers the recess 5408, e.g., when there are no sampling lines (e.g., pressure lines) connected, and, thus, the recess 5408 can be completely sealed (with a simple flat covering 5406).

[001156] To further illustrate the technique or concept of interchangeable coverings (or lids), Figure 163 shows a breathing assistance apparatus having a base unit 15000 (with a portable display unit 15002 connected thereto), the base unit 15000 having a recess 15004 within which are disposed two sensors 15006, 15008 (for instance on a PCB 15003 placed within the recess 15004). To the left of Figure 163 are shown three interchangeable coverings 15010, 15012, 15022 dimensioned to cooperate with the recess 15004.

[001157] The first covering 15010 is simply a flat panel without any sampling ports or pressure ports, to cover the recess 15004 (including the sensors 15006, 15008) without enabling connection of sampling lines to the sensors 15006, 15008. The first covering 15010 may be used when the base unit 15000 is in an operating or therapy mode that does not require connection of pressure lines.

[001158] The second covering 15012 includes one pressure port/prong 15014 embedded within the covering 15012. The second covering 15012 may be used for therapy modes that require a single pressure line (not shown) and thus only a single pressure port/prong 15014. In use, the covering 15012 is brought into alignment/contact with the recess 15004. The bottom portion 15016 of the prong 15014 forms a contact or operative connection with the first pressure sensor 15006. The top portion 15018 of the prong 15014 is connected, in use, to a pressure line (not shown). The other pressure sensor 15008 is not required in this mode; as such, it is covered by a portion 15020 of the body of the covering 15012, said portion 15020 being adjacent the prong 15014.

[001159] The third covering 15022 includes two pressure ports/prongs 15024, 15026 embedded within the covering 15022. The third covering 15022 may be used for therapy modes that require two pressure lines (not shown) and thus two pressure ports/prongs 15024, 15026. When the covering 15022 is brought into alignment/contact with the recess 15004, the bottom portions 15028, 15030 of the respective prongs 15024, 15026 form contacts or operative connections with the respective pressure sensors 15006, 15008. The top portions 15032, 15034 of the respective prongs 15024, 15026 are connected, in use, to respective pressure lines (not shown).

[001160] The three coverings 15010, 15012, 15022 can be removed and swapped out as required in use, such as when switching from one therapy mode to another.

[001161] The principles illustrated in Figure 163 may broadly apply to various embodiments of the sampling ports/pressure prongs and coverings disclosed herein. For example, in Figure 78, the covering 5106 has an embedded prong 5100 that broadly corresponds to the covering 15012 and prong 15014 in Figure 163; and the covering 5406 in Figure 81 broadly corresponds to the covering 15010 in Figure 163, namely a simple lid (sans prong) to cover and isolate the recess when pressure lines are not required.

[001162] Of course, as discussed elsewhere herein, the ports/prongs need not necessarily be embedded in a covering or lid. The ports may equally be brought into contact with (or be permanently mounted in contact with) or may operatively communicate with the pressure sensors independently of any covering or lid. The schematics in Figures 79 and 80 illustrate a port/prong 5200, 5300 being placed to operatively communicate with or in contact with the sensors 5212, 5312 without the use of a covering or lid.

[001163] In some configurations, the sampling port(s), e.g., pressure prong(s), may be illuminated or may light up when the base unit determines or detects that pressure line(s) needs to be connected to the sampling port(s).

[001164] In some configurations, the sampling port(s), e.g., pressure prong(s), may be illuminated or may light up when there is a connection error with the sampling line.

[001165] The sampling port(s) may be illuminated by a light source arranged around and/or behind the sampling port(s).

[001166] The sampling port(s) may be illuminated by a light source arranged in the base unit. For example, referring to Figure 73, the light source may be part of the electrical circuit within the recess 4608 or removably receivable within the recess 4608 of the base unit 50. [001167] The light source to illuminate the sampling port(s) may include one or more LEDs.

[001168] The sampling port(s) may be formed, at least in part, from an optically transparent material. For example, the sampling port(s) may be at least substantially translucent or transparent.

[001169] Illumination of the sampling port(s) may be turned off when it is determined that there is connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line and/or after a defined period of time.

[001170] Figure 82 shows a partial view of a base unit 50, illustrating illumination of a sampling port, e.g., a pressure prong 5500, on the base unit 50.

[001171] Also shown is a pressure line 5510 having a complementary port 5512 (e.g., having a threaded portion) that is engageable with or connectable to the prong 5500.

[001172] Also shown is illumination of a base unit notification light 5240.

[001173] As a non-limiting example, the pressure prong(s) 5500 may be illuminated if the base unit 50, or the breathing assistance system having the base unit 50 is switched to an operating mode that requires the use of a pressure line(s) 5510, or more generally, if the base unit 50 or the breathing assistance system detects that a pressure line 5510 should be connected but isn't. Illumination of the pressure prong(s) 5500 makes it visually clear and intuitive to the user what action needs to be taken.

[001174] The illuminated pressure port/prong 5500 could form a stand-alone alarm, e.g., when the pressure line 5510 is detected as needing to be connected, the pressure port 5500 alone could be illuminated.

[001175] Alternatively, the pressure port 5500 may be illuminated in conjunction with other alerts/alarms: (i) the upper and/or lower light bars (e.g., the portable display unit notification light 4150, 4150' (e.g., as shown in Figures 55, 56), and/or the base unit notification light 240 (e.g., as shown in Figures 58, 60), 5240 may illuminate synchronously or in combination with the pressure port illumination, and/or (ii) a message may be displayed on the screen indicating the need to connect a pressure line. [001176] Different colours of illumination of the pressure port 5500, and/or the light bars 240, 4150, 4150', 5240 may be used. For example, the pressure port 5500 itself may repeatedly flash, e.g., red, when a pressure line 5510 needs connecting, and then briefly flash, e.g., green, once connected. Additionally, or alternatively, the light bars 240, 4150, 4150', 5240 may illuminate with a dedicated colour (or a flash sequence) to convey that the pressure line 5510 needs connecting.

[001177] In some configurations, only the light bars 240, 4150, 4150', 5240 , but not the prong 5500, may be illuminated to indicate that the pressure line(s) 5510 needs to be connected.

[001178] It should be appreciated that one or more of the pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701 (see, for example, Figures 73 to 77) may be similarly illuminated as described in the context of the pressure prong 5500.

[001179] In some configurations, whether a pressure line needs to be connected to a pressure port, or whether a pressure line is connected or correctly connected or not, may be determined based on the operating mode of the base unit or the therapy to be administered. For example, if an operating mode requiring pressure line(s) is selected, or there is a switch to an operating mode that requires pressure line(s), the pressure port may be illuminated (e.g., for a predetermined period of time) to prompt the user to connect the pressure line(s). In this way, pressure port illumination is based on determination or detection of an operating mode selection or change.

[001180] In some configurations, the presence or absence of pressure line(s) may be directly sensed through a number of approaches.

[001181] One approach may be to incorporate an electrical connector into the end of the pressure line, and a corresponding connector on, for example, the PCB (e.g., PCB 4610, 5110, 5210, 5310, 5410). Electrical coupling of both connectors to one another, or communication between both connectors may be used to indicate presence of the pressure line.

[001182] Another approach may be to consider leak flow at a "leak point" in the system, for example, a leak point at the patient interface (e.g., mask). Using the arrangement shown in Figure 73 as a non-limiting example, when the pressure line 4602 is connected, a closed loop is effectively formed together with the patient interface 4604, the breathing conduit 4694, the base unit 50 and the pressure prong 4600. If the pressure line 4602 is disconnected at the patient interface 4604, a leak point at the patient interface 4604 will be open to atmosphere and so the leak path has a lower resistance, and in turn the leak flow through the leak point will be greater. The base unit 50 may be able to detect and quantify the leak. For example, a leak above a certain threshold at the leak point may indicate disconnection of the pressure line 4602. It should be appreciated that the leak point may additionally or alternatively be at the pressure prong 4600.

[001183] A further approach may be to attempt to force gas out of the pressure port(s) and determine the resistance. If the pressure line(s) is/are disconnected, there is less resistance as the gas is vented to atmosphere.

[001184] In some configurations, the pressure port(s) may be provided as part of a portable sampling device, e.g., in the form of pressure units (or pressure 'pucks') 5610, 5710, 5810 as shown in Figures 83 to 85. As a non-limiting example, the pressure units 5610, 5710, 5810 may be modular pressure sensor units.

[001185] Each pressure unit 5610, 5710, 5810 may include a device housing 5612, 5712, 5812 that may be circularly shaped although other suitable shapes, for example, oval/elliptical, square, rectangle, etc., may be provided. An electrical circuit (to be described below with reference to Figures 86 and 87) may be provided within the housing 5612, 5712, 5812. Electrical conduits or cables 5614, 5714, 5814, 5815 may be electrically coupled to the electrical circuit, extending out of the housing 5612, 5712, 5812 and ending with electrical connectors or ports, e.g., in the form of USB connectors 5616, 5716, 5816, 5817. The pressure unit 5810 includes a main USB connector 5816, and an additional USB connector 5817 for low power for the pressure unit components. It is also within the scope of the disclosure for any one of the pressure units 5610, 5710, 5810 to communicate wirelessly with the base unit, instead of (or in addition to) via the conduits or cables 5614, 5714, 5814, 5815.

[001186] The pressure unit 5610 includes two pressure ports 5600, 5601, the pressure unit 5710 includes one pressure port 5700, while the pressure unit 5810 includes one pressure port 5800. One or more of the pressure ports 5600, 5601, 5700, 5800 may be coupled or removably coupled to the housing 5612, 5712, 5812.

[001187] The pressure ports 5600, 5601, 5700, 5800 may operatively communicate with the electrical circuit within the housing 5612, 5712, 5812.

[001188] Each pressure unit 5610, 5710, 5810 may be removably attachable or mountable to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus, e.g., to a rear wall or a side wall of the base unit. A mounting feature, for example, in the form of a device mounting plate or bracket 5620 and having an adhesive (or tape) 5622, may be provided for attaching the pressure unit 5610, 5710, 5810 to the base unit.

[001189] Each pressure unit 5610, 5710, 5810 can be used to add/retrofit

(more) pressure detection capabilities to an existing base unit. It may also provide for increased compatibility or interoperability with different patient breathing circuits and breathing assistance apparatuses. A breathing assistance apparatus might not have pressure sampling ports such as those described above, so detecting pressure (or other parameters) in breathing circuits, patient interfaces, etc. might not be possible. However, the pressure unit 5610, 5710, 5810 provides the necessary functionality.

[001190] Referring to Figures 86 and 87, electrical circuits 5900, 6000 may be supported by or housed within the housings 5612, 5712, 5812 of the pressure units 5610, 5710, 5810. Each electrical circuit 5900, 6000 may include a USB port 5902, 6002 (or more generally an electrical conduit coupling port) for electrical coupling of the electrical conduits 5614, 5714, 5814, 5815.

[001191] The electrical circuit 5900 may include a sensor arrangement having two pressure sensors 5904, 5905. A respective sensor 5904, 5905 may be associated with a respective pressure port. The electrical circuit 6000 may include a sensor arrangement having one pressure sensor 6004.

[001192] A pressure unit may include a suitable electrical circuit depending on the configuration of the pressure unit, for example, depending on the number of pressure port(s). For example, the pressure unit 5610 of Figure 83 may have the electrical circuit 5900, while the pressure unit 5710 of Figure 84 may have the electrical circuit 6000, and the pressure unit 5810 of Figure 85 may have an electrical circuit similar to 6000 but with the electrical conduit coupling port(s) configured to accommodate connection of the two cables 5814, 5815.

[001193] The pressure units 5610, 5710, 5810 include the pressure ports 5600, 5601, 5700, 5800 to which the pressure lines are to connect in use, as well as internal pressure sensors 5904, 5905, 6004 for each pressure line. So, pressure may be sensed at the units 5610, 5710, 5810, and then communicated via wired USB-type connection with connectors 5616, 5716, 5816, 5817 to the base unit 50.

[001194] One or more of the pressure ports 5600, 5601, 5700, 5800 may be illuminated as described in the context of the pressure prong 5500 of Figure 82. [001195] While the disclosure provides for USB connectors and USB ports, it should be appreciated that other types of electrical connectors and corresponding electrical ports may be provided.

[001196] As a non-limiting example, Figure 88 shows a perspective view of a breathing assistance apparatus 6100 having a base unit 50, a portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000 removably connectable to the base unit, and the pressure unit 5710 mountable to the side of the base unit 50. The pressure unit 5710 includes a USB connector 5716 configured to electrically couple to the base unit 50.

[001197] Figure 89 shows different perspective views of a pressure unit 6210 being attached or mounted on the base unit 50 using a mounting bracket 5620. Also shown is a pressure line 6212 being connected to a pressure port of the pressure unit 6210. A retaining structure 6214 (to be described further below), for example, for cable management, may be provided on the base unit 50 for retaining and/or securing a cable 6216 (e.g., the power cable of the base unit 50).

[001198] The number of pressure ports to be used may be configurable. The number of pressure ports may be changeable, e.g., by swapping out the pressure units themselves (e.g., swapping out a first pressure unit with a second pressure unit having a different number of pressure ports), or removing the pressure port(s) from the pressure units if the port(s) are inserts, or obscuring one or more of the ports. Respective covers (not shown) may be provided to cover respective pressure ports 5600, 5601, 5700, 5800.

[001199] It should be appreciated that the pressure units 5610, 5710, 5810 may be configured as other types of sampling units having one or more sampling port(s), for example, for sensing not just pressure but other parameters such as flow, end tidal CO2, ECG, etc. The sampling units may be sampling pucks.

[001200] In some configurations, the pressure port(s) may be provided as part of a portable sampling device, e.g., in the form of a pressure orifice 6310, 6510, 6610 as shown in Figures 90 to 93. The pressure orifice 6310, 6510, 6610 may be removably coupled to a pressure line, or a patient breathing circuit as the pressure line.

[001201] Referring to Figures 90 to 92, each pressure orifice 6310, 6510 may include a pressure port which may be or may include a flexible pressure diaphragm 6420. The flexible pressure diaphragm 6420 may be coupled to an in-line adapter 6322, 6522. For example, an orifice or opening 6324 may be defined in the in-line adapter 6322, 6522 to receive the flexible pressure diaphragm 6420. [001202] The in-line adapter 6322, 6522 may be connected to or with a patient breathing circuit 6390, 6590 that may include a patient interface or mask 6592. The breathing circuit 6390, 6590 may be the pressure line or part of the pressure line.

[001203] A flow restrictor 6326, 6526 (e.g., for variable flow CPAP, NIPPV), shown schematically in Figures 90 to 92, may be connected to the in-line adapter 6322, 6522. The breathing circuit 6390, 6590 is connected to one end of the in-line adapter 6322, 6522, while the flow restrictor 6326, 6526 is connected to an opposite end of the inline adapter 6322, 6522. The flow restrictor 6326, 6526 may be used to regulate expiratory pressure during exhalation. As a non-limiting example, the flow restrictor 6326, 6526 and the pressure port (such as the flexible pressure diaphragm 6420) may be coupled to an expiratory limb of a breathing circuit when used in dual-limb circuit arrangements.

[001204] In some configurations, the in-line adapter 6322, 6522 may form part of the pressure port. In other words, the flexible pressure diaphragm 6420 and the inline adapter 6322, 6522 may together define the pressure port. Alternatively, the inline adapter 6322, 6522 may be provided as part of the breathing circuit 6390, 6590, e.g., integrated with the breathing circuit 6390, 6590, or separately connectable to the breathing circuit 6390, 6590.

[001205] The pressure orifice 6310, 6510 may further include a sensor module 6311, 6511. The sensor module 6311, 6511 may be reusable.

[001206] The sensor module 6311, 6511 may have an electrical circuit 6400 housed within a device housing 6312, 6512. The flexible pressure diaphragm 6420 may operatively communicate with the electrical circuit 6400. The flexible pressure diaphragm 6420 may be coupled or removably coupled to the housing 6312, 6512.

[001207] The electrical circuit 6400 may include a sensor arrangement having a pressure sensor 6404 to be associated with the flexible pressure diaphragm 6420.

[001208] The electrical circuit 6400 may further include a USB port (or more generally, an electrical conduit coupling port) 6402 for electrical coupling of an electrical conduit or cable 6314, 6514, such as via a USB connector 6316. At the other end of the electrical conduit 6314, 6514, there may be another USB connector (or other electrical connector) for electrical coupling to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus (e.g., base unit 50 described herein) to transfer power to the electrical circuit 6400 and/or sensor signals/data from the sensor and back to the base unit. [001209] As a non-limiting example, the pressure orifice 6310, 6510 may be connected to the breathing circuit 6390, 6590 as shown more clearly in Figure 92. Inspiratory flow, as represented by the arrow 6580, may be provided through a breathing conduit 6594, as part of the breathing circuit 6390, 6590. The inspiratory flow 6580 flows to the patient interface 6592. Expiratory flow, as represented by the arrow 6582, from the patient interface 6592, may exit through the in-line adaptor 6322, 6522 to the flow restrictor 6326, 6526. The in-line adaptor 6322, 6522 is coupled to the housing 6312, 6512 of the sensor module 6311, 6511 as described above.

[001210] As described above, the pressure orifice 6310, 6510 includes a pressure port, in the form of a flexible pressure diaphragm 6420 (as shown in Figure 91) (and optionally the in-line adapter 6322, 6522) to connect with a breathing circuit 6390, 6590, and an internal pressure sensor 6404. The pressure may be sensed at the pressure orifice 6310, 6510, and then communicated via wired (e.g., USB-type) connection with connector 6316 to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus. In this way, the sensor module 6311, 6511 may be arranged proximal to the patient interface (mask). Leading back from the sensor module 6311, 6511 to the base unit is an electrical conduit 6314, 6514 that conveys the pressure reading from the sensor 6404 to the base unit. It is also within the scope of the disclosure for the connection between the sensor module 6311, 6511 and the base unit to be wireless.

[001211] Figure 93 shows a schematic view of a breathing assistance apparatus having a base unit 50 as described herein and a pressure orifice 6610 electrically coupled to the base unit 50. The pressure orifice 6610 may include a pressure port as described above, and a sensor module 6611 that may be arranged proximate a patient interface 6692.

[001212] The pressure orifice 6610 may be electrically coupled to the base unit 50 via an electrical conduit 6614 connected to a connection port 6652 on the base unit 50. The electrical conduit 6614 transmits or conveys pressure readings to the base unit 50. The port connection 6652 may operatively communicate with or may be electrically coupled to a printed circuit board (PCB) 6650. The PCB 6650 may be arranged in or removably received in a recess 6608 defined in the base unit 50.

[001213] The pressure orifice 6610 may be removably coupled to the patient interface 6692. The patient interface 6692 is also connected to a breathing conduit 6694 that is in turn connected to a gases flow outlet 6621 of the base unit 50 to convey (main) gases flow or therapeutic gases flow from the base unit 50 to the patient interface 6692.

[001214] A flow restrictor 6626 may be connected to the pressure orifice 6610 to regulate expiratory pressure during exhalation. While not shown, the pressure orifice 6610 includes an in-line adapter. The patient interface 6692 is connected to one end of the in-line adapter, while the flow restrictor 6626 is connected to an opposite end of the in-line adapter.

[001215] It should be appreciated that the pressure orifice 6310, 6510, 6610 may be configured to have more than one pressure port. A corresponding number of pressure sensors 6404 may be provided in the sensor module 6311, 6511, 6611.

[001216] The number of pressure ports to be used may be configurable. The number of pressure ports may be changeable, e.g., by swapping out the pressure orifice with different ports themselves, or by removing the pressure port(s) from the pressure orifice if the port(s) are inserts, or by obscuring one or more of the ports. Respective covers (not shown) may be provided to cover respective pressure ports.

[001217] It should be appreciated that the pressure orifice 6310, 6510 may be configured as other types of portable sampling devices having one or more sampling port(s), for example, for sensing not just pressure but other parameters such as flow, end tidal CO2, ECG parameters, etc.

[001218] It should be appreciated that one or more features described above in relation to the pressure prongs may be applicable to any one of the pressure units 5610, 5710, 5810, and the pressure orifice 6310, 6510.

[001219] In some configurations where there may be a plurality of sampling lines (e.g., pressure lines) for connecting to corresponding sampling ports (e.g., pressure ports), a common solid or rigid or semi-rigid connecting structure or portion may be provided to support the plurality of sampling lines.

[001220] As a non-limiting example, Figure 94 shows a common connecting structure 6750 to support or hold in position the plurality of sampling lines 6702, 6703 for connecting to corresponding sampling ports 6700, 6701 provided on a base unit 50 of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[001221] There may be engagement portions 6752 extending from one side of the common connecting structure 6750 to engage with the corresponding sampling ports 6700, 6701. The engagement portions 6752 may be the sampling lines 6702, 6703 protruding through the common connecting structure 6750, or may be separate features provided on or with the common connecting structure 6750, with the sampling lines 6702, 6703 terminating within apertures defined in the common connecting structure 6750 to communicate with the corresponding engagement portions 6752.

[001222] The sampling lines 6702, 6703 may be permanently or removably connected to the common connecting structure 6750, e.g., via suitable connection options such as threaded connections or interference fits.

[001223] In some configurations, the common connecting structure 6750 may be arranged at or towards the end regions of the sampling lines 6702, 6703. The sampling lines 6702, 6703 may extend through the common connecting structure 6750.

[001224] Providing the common connecting structure 6750 may help to keep the sampling lines 6702, 6703 together and help to ensure that the sampling lines 6702, 6703 can only ever be connected in the right orientation — i.e., the sampling lines 6702, 6703 may be prevented from criss-crossing and connecting to the wrong sampling ports 6700, 6701.

[001225] It should be appreciated that the common connecting structure 6750 may be employed to support the sampling lines 6702, 6703 to connect to any of the pressure ports disclosed herein, including the pressure prongs, and the sampling ports provided as part of a pressure unit (or pressure puck) and a pressure orifice.

[001226] Further, it should be appreciated that one or more common connecting structures may be provided to support two, three, four or any higher number of sampling lines.

[001227] As described above, the present disclosure may provide a portable sampling device (e.g., pressure unit, pressure orifice) having at least one sampling port (e.g., pressure port 5600, 5601, 5700, 5800) configured to connect with a sampling line (e.g., pressure line 4602) associated with a patient, and an electrical circuit (e.g., electrical circuit 5900, 6000, 6400) configured to operatively communicate with the at least one sampling port, wherein the portable sampling device is configured to electrically couple to a base unit (e.g., base unit 50) of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[001228] The electrical circuit may include a light source (e.g., one or more LEDs). The light source may illuminate the at least one sampling port in response to a determination that an operating mode of the breathing assistance apparatus requires connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line.

[001229] The electrical circuit may be housed within a housing of the portable sampling device. The at least one sampling port may protrude from the housing.

[001230] A cover may be provided to cover the end region of the at least one sampling port that is to connect with the sampling line.

[001231] The portable sampling device may be couplable or attachable to the base unit.

[001232] A mounting feature couplable to the base unit may be provided to mount the portable sampling device to the base unit. The portable sampling device may include a device housing supporting the at least one sampling port and the electrical circuit, and the device housing may be mounted by the mounting feature to the base unit.

[001233] The portable sampling device may be couplable to a breathing circuit associated with the patient, e.g., couplable to a patient interface of the breathing circuit. The breathing circuit may be connected or connectable to the base unit to convey gases flow from the base unit to the patient.

[001234] The sampling line may be part of the breathing circuit.

[001235] The at least one sampling port may include a flexible pressure diaphragm (e.g., flexible pressure diaphragm 6420).

[001236] The at least one sampling port may further include an adapter (e.g., inline adapter 6322, 6522) configured to removably couple to the breathing circuit.

[001237] The portable sampling device may include a USB connector configured to engage with a complementary USB connector at the base unit.

[001238] In some configurations, a quantity of the sampling port(s) arranged to connect with corresponding sampling lines for a therapy session for the patient may be selectively configurable based on a breathing therapy mode to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus corresponding to the therapy session. The sampling port(s) to be used to connect with corresponding sampling line(s) may be defined as "active" sampling port(s).

Portable display unit dial [001239] In some configurations of a portable display unit, such as the portable display unit 6800 as shown in Figure 95, a dial 6890, supported by a shank 6812 and arranged over an annular wall 6810, may be fitted loosely. If a face-down impact occurs when the portable display unit 6800 is dropped, the dial 6890 may tilt over, e.g., due to tilting or bending of the shank 6812, and/or because a circumferential region (i.e., outer edge) of the dial 6890 is not adequately supported/retained and thus is able to tilt, bend, or be laterally displaced (see label "1" in Figure 95). This may cause lateral movement of the dial 6890, resulting in an impact with the display unit housing or frame 6814 — see label "2" indicating impact of the outer edge of the dial 6890 with the display unit housing 6814. Such an impact may cause the display unit housing 6814 to warp which in turn may cause the screen 6816 to shatter (see label "3").

[001240] The present disclosure provides techniques or configurations for drop dial survivability by reinforcing the dial of the portable display unit. The reinforcement techniques or configurations may be employed for the portable display units described herein, including those described in the "Portable display unit" section above, e.g., portable display units 3500, 3500, 4000. The dial may be the dial D described herein above. Each reinforcement technique or configuration may be employed on its own, or combined with one or more other reinforcement techniques or configurations.

[001241] A first dial reinforcement technique or configuration may include configuring the portable display unit to restrict movement of the dial in a lateral direction towards the display unit housing. This may minimise or prevent the risk of an impact imposing a point-load on the display unit housing of the portable display unit.

[001242] Referring to Figure 96, a portable display unit 6900 includes a display unit housing 6914 supporting a screen 6916, and a dial 6990 on the display unit housing 6914 on the same side (e.g., front side) as the screen 6916. The dial 6990 protrudes from the display unit housing 6914.

[001243] The dial 6990 may include a rotatable component to provide a first user input and a push button to provide a second (different) user input. The dial 6990 may be as described above in the "Portable display unit" section in relation to the dial D.

[001244] The display unit housing 6914 may include an annular wall 6910, with the dial 6990 fitted over the annular wall 6910. The dial 6990 may be supported by a shank 6912 arranged within the annular wall 6910. The shank 6912 may be mounted towards a rear side of the display unit housing 6914. [001245] Reinforcing the dial may include dimensioning and configuring the shank 6912 of the dial 6990 such that the shank 6912 sits snugly within the annular wall 6910 (see label "1") so that the shank 6912 is not able to or cannot tilt over when a force is applied. In this case, movement of the dial 6990 in a lateral direction towards the display unit housing 6914 may be restricted, leading to minimal or no impact on the display unit housing 6914 (see label "2"). Instead, the force exerted onto the dial 6990 is transmitted directly downwardly (see label "3").

[001246] Further, the dial 6990 may be snuggly fitted with the annular wall 6910. This may be achieved by suitably dimensioning and configuring the dial 6990. Compared to the portable display unit 6800 of Figure 95, additional material, as indicated with hatched lines in Figure 96, may be provided for the portable display unit 6900 to enable snug fitting of the shank 6912 and/or dial 6990. Such additional material may be part of the shank 6912 and/or the dial 6990.

[001247] With the snug fitting of the dial 6990 and/or the shank 6912 with the annual wall 6910, force impacting on the dial 6990 may be transmitted downwardly (e.g., into the interior of the display unit housing 6914).

[001248] A second dial reinforcement technique or configuration may include providing the display unit housing 6914 with a support wall 6920, 7020 as shown in Figures 96 and 97. This may help to strengthen the dial 6990.

[001249] The support wall 6920, 7020 may have a ribbed structure. This may mean that the support wall 6920, 7020 may include or may be a ribbed wall.

[001250] A section of the annular wall 6910 may define or coincide with a portion of the support wall 6920.

[001251] Referring to Figure 97 (which shows the front casing portion 7015 facedown, with the rear casing portion removed), as a non-limiting example, the support wall 7020 may be provided at the front casing portion 7015 of a display unit housing 7014. An opening 7018 is defined in the front casing portion 7015 for the screen, when assembled, to be exposed.

[001252] The support wall 6920, 7020 may be provided alongside the shank 6912 supporting the dial 6990, extending all the way from the dial 6990 on the front casing portion 7015 to the base/rear of the display unit housing 6914, 7014. For example, the support wall 6920, 7020 may extend from the dial 6990 to an internal surface of the display unit housing 6914, 7014 on the rear side, or the internal surface of the rear casing portion 6917 of the display unit housing 6914, 7014. The support wall 6920, 7020 may contact the dial 6990 and the internal surface of the display unit housing 6914 on the rear side (or the rear casing portion 6917).

[001253] By providing the support wall 6920, 7020, the force exerted on the dial 6990 may be transmitted, via the wall 6920, 7020, towards the rear/base of the display unit housing 6914, 7014, and away from the screen area. Also, the ribbing may help to prevent or at least minimise warping/buckling of the display unit housing 6914, 7014 and thus may further prevent cracking of the screen 6916.

[001254] A third dial reinforcement technique or configuration may include covering the dial in a soft material. For example, as shown in Figure 98, the dial 7190 of a portable display unit 7100 may be fitted with a cover 7102 made of an impact absorbent material.

[001255] The dial reinforcement techniques or configurations described above may help to minimise or prevent damage to the screen 6916 located adjacent the dial 6990, 7190. The reinforcement features are provided proximate the dial 6990, 7190.

[001256] In some configurations, the support wall 6920 may span the entire height from the dial 6990, 7190 to the rear casing portion 6917.

[001257] In some configurations, the support wall 6920 (when partly coincident with the annular wall 6910), and/or the annular wall 6910 itself, may be tucked under the "armpit" of the dial 6990, 7190 (e.g., proximate an outer/circumferential edge of the dial 6990 and the overhang/walls of the dial 6990 in that region) like a "crutch" as shown in Figure 96 (where the top portion of the support wall 6920 (and/or annular wall 6910) can be considered to be the "crutch"). Furthermore, the additional material (shown in hatched lines) provided to the shank 6912 and the dial 6990 may be arranged snugly to either side of the "crutch" portion, such that the dial 6990 is securely/snugly retained relative to the "crutch" portion to prevent lateral motion of the dial 6990 and/or the shank 6912.

[001258] As described above, the present disclosure may provide a portable display unit 6900 having a screen 6916, a display unit housing 6914 supporting the screen 6916, and a dial 6990 arranged on a side (e.g., front side) of the display unit housing 6914 having the screen 6916. The portable display unit 6900 is configured to restrict movement of the dial 6990 in a lateral direction towards the display unit housing 6914. [001259] With such a movement restriction, the dial 6990, upon impact by a force, may be prevented from impacting the display unit housing 6914, or a surface thereof, on the side of the display unit housing 6914 having the screen 6916. As a result, the force impacting on the dial 6990 may be transmitted downwardly into the interior of the display unit housing 6914.

[001260] The present disclosure may also provide a portable display unit 6900, 7100 having a screen 6916, a display unit housing 6914 supporting the screen 6916, a dial 6990, 7190 arranged on a side (e.g., front side) of the display unit housing 6914 having the screen 6916, and a cover 7102 configured to fit the dial 6990, 7190, the cover 7102 comprising an impact absorbent material.

Button illumination

[001261] In some configurations, there may be upper and lower "light bars", for example, a display unit notification light (e.g., 4150, 4150', Figures 55, 56), and a base unit notification light (e.g., 240, Figures 58, 60). Further, some buttons may be illuminable.

[001262] Referring to Figures 99 and 100, a display unit 7200 may include a screen 7216, a notification light (a form of optical element) 7250 in or on the display unit housing 7214, a dial 7290, a power button 7220 for switching on and off the display unit 7200, and a button 7230 for disabling an alarm or alert. The button 7230 may, thus, be an alarm disabling button. The dial 7290 may be any dial described herein.

[001263] The notification light 7250 may be provided at any suitable location in or on the display unit housing 7214, for example, at a top of the display unit housing 7214, at a bottom of the display unit housing 7214, or at a side of the display unit housing 7214.

[001264] In some configurations, the alarm may be activated on or originate from the display unit 7200.

[001265] The display unit 7200 may be coupled to or integrated with a base unit 50, or may be a portable display unit as described herein, including the portable display units 3500, 3500, 4000 that may be removably connectable to the base unit 50. The base unit 50 may include a notification light (a form of optical component) 7240.

[001266] The display unit notification light 7250 and/or the base unit notification light 7240 may light up and/or flash when there is an alert/alarm, as shown in Figure 100. This draws the user's attention to the alarm. It should be appreciated that there may be any number of different alarms, e.g., for different alert conditions. The colour and/or pattern of lighting up and/or flashing may vary depending on the type of alarm/alert, the urgency or criticality of the alarm/alert, etc.

[001267] In some configurations, additionally or alternatively to the notification lights 7240, 7250, the button 7230 can light up when there is an alert/alarm, as shown in Figure 100. The effect of this may be to convey to the user that the user can silence (e.g., mute or snooze, etc) the alarm (such as an audio alarm) by depressing or otherwise operating the button 7230. Accordingly, in some configurations, the button 7230 may be configured as a mute button.

[001268] The alarm may include an audio alarm. As a non-limiting example, the audio alarm may be provided from or via an audio output or a speaker provided on the display unit 7200.

[001269] In some configurations, the notification lights 7240, 7250 may act as a visual alarm and the button 7230 may be used to switch off illumination of the notification lights 7240, 7250.

[001270] In some configurations, the button 7230 may be used to disable an audio alarm and/or a visual alarm.

[001271] In some configurations, the button 7230 may be illuminated or light up in concert or in accordance with one or more of the notification lights 7240, 7250. For example, the button 7230 may be illuminated or light up in synchronisation with or in a similar illumination pattern as or with a similar colour as the illumination of one or more of the notification lights 7240, 7250.

[001272] The button 7230 may be illuminated or light up continuously or intermittently (e.g., flashing) when there is an alert/alarm. In one non-limiting example, the illumination pattern of the button 7230 may be determined by what one or more of the notification lights 7240, 7250 are doing (e.g., just illuminating, or flashing).

[001273] Once depressed or otherwise operated, the button 7230 may remain illuminated, or the illumination of the button 7230 may be switched off if it was previously in an illuminated state.

[001274] In some configurations, one or more of the notification lights 7240, 7250 and the button 7230 may be illuminated using one or more LEDs. [001275] While the button 7230 is a physical button provided on the display unit housing 7214, additionally or alternatively, a graphical or virtual button for disabling the alarm may be provided as part of a graphical user interface (GUI) displayed on the screen 7216. The graphical button may be illuminated in response to activation of an alarm similar to that described above for the button 7230.

[001276] The display unit 7200 may be a portable display unit.

[001277] The display unit 7200 may be provided as part of a breathing assistance apparatus, and configured to communicate with a base unit 50 of the breathing assistance apparatus.

[001278] It should be appreciated that the button illumination described herein may be employed with any of the breathing assistance apparatus (or the base unit thereof) and/or portable display unit described herein, including those described in the "Breathing assistance apparatus", "Portable display unit", and "Base unit" sections above.

Connectors

[001279] The present disclosure provides for a connection structure having a connection component configured to engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit, and a mounting component (e.g., a fastening component) configured to mount (or fasten) the connection component to a support component.

[001280] The connection component may be coupled to the mounting component.

[001281] The mounting component may, for example, be a clamp.

[001282] The support component may be or may include any suitable support components, including, for example, a medical pole.

[001283] The connection component may engage with a complementary connection component of any of the portable display units described herein, including those described in the "Portable display unit" section above, e.g., portable display units 3500, 3500, 4000.

[001284] The complementary connection component may be received by the connection component of the connection structure. [001285] The complementary connection component may be slidably received by the connection component of the connection structure.

[001286] The connection component may be movable relative to the mounting component.

[001287] The connection component may be tiltable relative to the mounting component. The tilt angle of the connection component relative to the mounting component may be adjustable by a user.

[001288] In some configurations, when the connection component is mounted to the support component and is further engaged with the complementary connection component of the portable display unit, the connection structure may maintain the portable display unit at an (non-zero) angle relative to the support component.

[001289] In some configurations, the connection component may be coupled to the mounting component at a fixed angle relative to the mounting component. Such a configuration allows, in use, the portable display unit to be tilted relative to the support member when the complementary connection component is engaged with the connection component.

[001290] In some configurations, the connection component may include a female connection component, e.g., as described herein above in the context of the connection component 2071.

[001291] While the connection structure is described below based on the nonlimiting example of a female connection component as the connection component of the connection structure, it should be appreciated that the connection component, in some configurations, may be or may include a male connection component.

[001292] As described above, e.g., in the "Portable display unit", and "Base unit" sections above, there may be a first female connector (or female connection component) on the base device itself, and a second female connector (optionally, a "twin" of the first female connector) elsewhere, for example, on a support component such as a medical pole. This allows for a portable display unit to be either connected to the base unit, or connected to the further component, via the respective female connectors or connection components.

[001293] A support structure having a support component and the connection structure described herein that is attachable to the support component may be provided. The support structure may support medical equipment. For example, the support component may be or may include a medical pole.

[001294] Figures 101 and 102 show perspective views of a connection structure 7400 as mounted on or to a support component 7402 (e.g., a medical pole). The connection structure 7400 is also shown in side views (Figures 103 and 104), top view (Figure 105), bottom view (Figure 106), and rear view (Figures 107 and 108).

[001295] The connection structure 7400 includes a connection component 7471 and a mounting component 7410 to mount the connection component 7471 to the support component 7402. The mounting component 7410 may be coupled to the connection component 7471. The connection component 7471 may engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit. The mounting component 7410 may be a fastening component to fasten the connection component 7471 to the support component 7402.

[001296] The mounting component 7410 may be or may include a clamp, for example, in the form of a G clamp as shown in Figures 101 to 108.

[001297] The clamp 7410 may include a (fixed) frame 7412 that may be positioned against or abut the support component 7402, and a movable bar 7414 that is movable to also abut the support component 7402. A handle 7416 is coupled to the movable bar 7414 for operating the movable bar 7414. The movable bar 7414 may be movable through a portion of the frame 7412. The movable bar 7414 may be a threaded bar.

[001298] The frame 7412 and the movable bar 7414 may be operable to abut the support component 7402 on opposite sides of the support component 7402 to mount or secure the connection structure 7400 to the support component 7402.

[001299] The connection component 7471 may be pivotably mounted to the mounting component 7410 to allow tilting of the connection component 7471 relative to the mounting component 7410.

[001300] Figures 109 to 118 show another connection structure 8200. The connection structure 8200 is shown in perspective views (Figures 109 to 111 and 117) rear view (Figure 112), side views (Figures 113 and 114), top view (Figure 115), bottom view (Figure 116), and exploded view (Figure 118)

[001301] The connection structure 8200 includes a connection component 7471 and a mounting component 8210 to mount the connection component 7471 to a support component (not shown). The support component may, for example, be the support component 7402 shown in Figures 101 to 107. The mounting component 8210 may be coupled to the connection component 7471. The connection component 7471 may engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit. The mounting component 8210 may be a fastening component to fasten the connection component 7471 to the support component.

[001302] The mounting component 8210 may be or may include a clamp, for example, in the form of a C-clamp as shown in Figures 109 to 118.

[001303] The clamp 8210 may include a (fixed) frame 8212 that may be positioned against or abut a support component, and a movable bar 8214 that is movable to also abut the support component. A handle 8216 is coupled to the movable bar 8214 for operating the movable bar 8214. The movable bar 8214 may be movable through a portion of the frame 8212. The movable bar 8214 may be a threaded bar.

[001304] The frame 8212 and the movable bar 8214 may be operable to abut a support component on opposite sides of the support component to mount or secure the connection structure 8200 to the support component.

[001305] The connection component 7471 may be pivotably mounted to the mounting component 8210 to allow tilting of the connection component 7471 relative to the mounting component 8210. Such mounting may be achieved using pivoting components 9100 as shown in Figure 118, including, for example, threaded components, bar and washers.

[001306] The connection component 7471 of the connection structures 7400, 8200 may be substantially identical to the connector or connection component on the base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus. This allows a portable display unit to be attached to or supported on the base unit and the support component (e.g., a medical pole).

[001307] The connection component 7471 of the connection structures 7400, 8200 may be or may include the connection component 2071 described herein above, or any one of the connection components 9271, 9371, 9471 described below.

[001308] As described above, a tiltable female connection component 7471 may be provided. The connection component 7471 may be, for example, a medical pole connector. The connection component 7471 may be mounted on a pole clamp 7410, 8210. [001309] The connection component 7471 may be selectively ti Ita ble/pivota ble such that the angle of a portable display unit, when engaged with the connection component 7471, and the connection component 7471 being mounted to a medical pole, is adjustable by a user (e.g., via mechanisms such as a friction arrangement that allows the user to alter the angle, and then maintains that angle).

[001310] Figure 119 shows a perspective view of a further connection structure 9200. The connection structure 9200 includes a connection component 9271 and a mounting component 9210 to mount the connection component 9271 to a support component (not shown). The support component may, for example, be the support component 7402 shown in Figures 101 to 107.

[001311] The connection component 9271 may be coupled to the mounting component 9210 at a fixed angle. In this way, the connection component 9271 may be tilted at a fixed angle, e.g., 10 - 15 degrees, for improved viewing.

[001312] The connection component 9271 may engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit.

[001313] As a non-limiting example, the mounting component 9210 may include a base structure 9250. The base structure 9250 may be received by a connector provided on a support component. The base structure 9250 may include a tongue-like structure or a wedge-like structure. Nevertheless, it should be appreciated that other suitable options may be provided as the mounting component 9210.

[001314] The connection component 9271 may include a backing structure 9270, and a surrounding wall 9272 extending from the backing structure 9270 (e.g., extending on or from three sides of the backing structure 9270). The backing structure 9270 and the surrounding wall 9272 may define a connection housing which acts as a receiver.

[001315] The surrounding wall 9272 may include a forward wall 9275, two side walls 9277, and two inwardly directed flanges 9279. The two flanges 9279 may be at least substantially parallel or at least substantially coplanar to one another. The flanges 9279 are spaced apart from one another to define a spacing 9281 between the flanges 9279. The flanges 9279 are spaced apart from the backing structure 9270 to define a gap 9280 therebetween.

[001316] The surrounding wall 9272 with the two flanges 9279 may be U-shaped. [001317] An opening 9283 is defined by the backing structure 9270 and the surrounding wall 9272 at an end or side of the connection component 9271 opposite the forward wall 9275. A complementary connection component may be received through the opening 9283 into the gap 9280.

[001318] Each flange 9279 may include a tapered end portion adjacent to the opening 9283. Each tapered end portion may be a curved end portion.

[001319] A recess 9290, as a form of a (complementary) retention feature, may be defined in the connection component 9271. Nevertheless, it should be appreciated that the recess 9290 may be optional.

[001320] The connection component 9271 may be a female connection component as part of a sliding connector.

[001321] The connection component 9271 of the connection structure 9200 may be substantially identical to the connector or connection component on the base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus. This allows a portable display unit to be attached to or supported on the base unit and the support component (e.g., a medical pole).

[001322] As described above, a fixed angle female connection component 9271 may be provided. The connection component 9271 is angled at a fixed angle. The connection component 9271 may be mounted on or coupled to a mounting component 9210, e.g., a triangular base or wedge, that abuts the support component in use, to give the connection component 9271 a fixed angle (relative to the support component).

[001323] It should be appreciated that, alternatively, any one of the connection component 2071 described herein above, or any one of the connection components 9371, 9471 described below may be provided with the mounting component 9210.

[001324] Figure 120 shows a connection component 9371 that may engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit. The portable display unit may be any portable display unit, including any one of the portable display units described herein, for example, those described in the "Portable display unit" section above, e.g., portable display units 3500, 3500, 4000.

[001325] The connection component 9371 may include a backing structure 9370, and a surrounding wall 9372 extending from the backing structure 9370 (e.g., extending on or from three sides of the backing structure 9370). The backing structure 9370 and the surrounding wall 9372 may define a connection housing which acts as a receiver.

[001326] The surrounding wall 9372 may include a forward wall 9375, two side walls 9377, and two inwardly directed flanges 9379. The two flanges 9379 may be at least substantially parallel or at least substantially coplanar to one another. The flanges 9379 are spaced apart from one another to define a spacing 9381 between the flanges 9379. The flanges 9379 are spaced apart from the backing structure 9370 to define a gap 9380 therebetween.

[001327] The surrounding wall 9372 with the two flanges 9379 may be U-shaped.

[001328] An opening 9383 is defined by the backing structure 9370 and the surrounding wall 9372 at an end or side of the connection component 9371 opposite the forward wall 9375. A complementary connection component may be received through the opening 9383 into the gap 9380.

[001329] Each flange 9379 includes a tapered end portion adjacent to the opening 9383. Each tapered end portion may be a curved end portion.

[001330] A recess 9390, as a form of a (complementary) retention feature, may be defined in the connection component 9371. Nevertheless, it should be appreciated that the recess 9390 may be optional.

[001331] As described above, the top ends of the "U" shape defined by the surrounding wall 9372 are tapered. This is to aid the user in aligning a male connection component with the "U" shape, and to provide a measure of latitude.

[001332] The connection component 9371 may be a female connection component as part of a sliding connector.

[001333] The connection component 9371 may be coupled to or mountable to or attachable to at least one of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus or a support component (e.g., a medical pole). The connection component 9371 may engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit to support the portable display unit.

[001334] In some configurations, the connection component 9371 may be used in place of the connection component 2071 described herein above, e.g., in the "Portable display unit", and "Base unit" sections above. [001335] Figure 121 shows a connection component 9471 that may engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit. The portable display unit may be any one of the portable display units described herein, including those described in the "Portable display unit" section above, e.g., portable display units 3500, 3500, 4000.

[001336] The connection component 9471 may include a backing structure 9470, and a surrounding wall 9472 extending from the backing structure 9470 (e.g., extending on or from three sides of the backing structure 9470). The backing structure 9470 and the surrounding wall 9472 may define a connection housing which acts as a receiver.

[001337] The surrounding wall 9472 may include a forward wall 9475, two side walls 9477, and two inwardly directed flanges 9479. The two flanges 9479 may be at least substantially parallel or at least substantially coplanar to one another. The flanges 9479 are spaced apart from one another to define a spacing 9481 between the flanges 9479. The flanges 9479 are spaced apart from the backing structure 9470 to define a gap 9480 therebetween.

[001338] The surrounding wall 9472 with the two flanges 9479 may be U-shaped.

[001339] An opening 9483 is defined by the backing structure 9470 and the surrounding wall 9472 at an end or side of the connection component 9471 opposite the forward wall 9475. A complementary connection component may be received through the opening 9483 into the gap 9480.

[001340] Each flange 9479 includes a tapered end portion adjacent to the opening 9483. Each tapered end portion may be a curved end portion.

[001341] The connection component 9471 may be a female connection component as part of a sliding connector.

[001342] The connection component 9471 may be coupled to or mountable to or attachable to at least one of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus or a support component (e.g., a medical pole). The connection component 9471 may engage with a complementary connection component of a portable display unit to support the portable display unit.

[001343] In some configurations, the connection component 9471 may be used in place of the connection component 2071 described herein above, e.g., in the "Portable display unit", and "Base unit" sections above. [001344] Figure 122 shows, in a rear perspective view, a connection component 9571 that may be provided for or attachable to a portable display unit 9500. The portable display unit 9500 may be any portable display unit, including any one of the portable display units described herein, for example, those described in the "Portable display unit" section above, e.g., portable display units 3500, 3500, 4000.

[001345] The portable display unit 9500 may include a display unit housing 9501, an optical element (e.g., a notification light) 9550, and a tethering component 9590 for tethering the portable display unit 9500 with a base unit (e.g., base unit 50 described herein above) of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[001346] The portable display unit 9500 may further include a connection component 9571 disposed on the display unit housing 9501. The connection component 9571 may be disposed on the rear side of the portable display unit 9500. The connection component 9571 may enable the portable display unit 9500 to be removably connected to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus and/or to a (different) support component.

[001347] A recess 9540 may be defined in the display unit housing 9501 and the connection component 9571 may be arranged or disposed in the recess 9540.

[001348] The connection component 9571 may include a body portion (or tongue portion) 9520 and two flanges 9522 extending from a region of the body portion 9520 on opposite sides of the body portion 9520. The body portion 9520 may be received by a complementary connection component via a sliding motion (along a longitudinal axis of the body portion 9520), and the two flanges 9522 may act to confine the sliding motion up to the region of the body portion 9520. This may mean that the two flanges 9522 may act as stoppers to prevent the sliding motion beyond the two flanges 9522.

[001349] The body portion 9520 may extend from a first side of the display unit housing 9501 towards a second side of the display unit housing 9501. The connection component 9571 may be received by a complementary connection component from the second side, and the sliding motion associated with the complementary connection component may be in a direction from the second side to the first side.

[001350] The body portion 9520 may extend in a first direction and the two flanges 9522 may extend in a second direction. The first and second directions may be substantially orthogonal to one another. In this way, the connection component 9571 may have a T-shaped profile as seen from the rear of the portable display unit 9500. [001351] The connection component 9571 may be a T-slot connection component.

[001352] The connection component 9571 may be a male connection component.

[001353] The connection component 9571 may be a component of a dovetail connector to engage with another component of the dovetail connector.

[001354] In some configurations, the complementary connection component that receives the body portion 9520 may be any one of the connection components 2071, 7471, 9271, 9371, 9471 described herein above.

[001355] The portable display unit 9500 may further include a retention feature (or engagement feature) 9530 that may engage with a complementary retention feature (e.g., provided on a complementary connection component). The retention feature 9530 may be provided or disposed on the connection component 9571.

[001356] The retention feature 9530 may include a protrusion or a button that may engage with a complementary retention feature in the form of a recess, e.g., recess 9290, 9390 (Figures 119, 120).

[001357] The portable display unit 9500 may further include a release feature (e.g., a lever) 9534 operable to release the retention feature 9530 from engagement with the complementary retention feature. The release feature 9534 may act like an eject button.

[001358] The release feature 9534 may be arranged at or near the top of the connection component 9571, e.g., proximal to the flanges 9522. The release feature 9534 may be arranged near the top of the rear side of the portable display unit 9500, positioned such that, in use, a user can reach behind the top of the portable display unit 9500 and easily press the release feature 9534, to depress the retention feature 9530 and allow separation of the portable display unit 9500 from the base unit or the support structure that the portable display unit 9500 is mounted to.

[001359] The body portion 9520 may extend from the first side of the display unit housing 9501 towards the second side of the display unit housing 9501, where the connection component 9571 may be received by a complementary connection component from the second side, and the release feature 9534 may be disposed proximal to the first side. As a non-limiting example, the first side is the top side of the display unit housing 9501 in use, such that a user may reach around the top of the display unit housing 9501 to operate or press the release feature 9534. Such an arrangement may enable a one-handed (and one-move) motion or operation, as a user can operate the release feature 9534 while gripping the display unit housing 9501 all with one hand and lift the portable display unit 9500 off.

[001360] The portable display unit 9500 may further include hand-grip regions on the right and left sides of the rear of the display unit housing 9501. These hand-grip regions may include suitable patterns or structures 9591, e.g., raised portions or recessed portions, such as in the form of bumps, ridges, ribs, straight lines, wavy lines, etc., to allow a user to better hold or grip the portable display unit 9500.

Retaining structure

[001361] The present disclosure provides a retaining structure 9614 as shown in Figure 123. The retaining structure 9614 may be mountable or attachable to a surface or structure 9650, e.g., to a wall (e.g., rear wall or side wall) of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus. The base unit may be the base unit 50 disclosed herein. As a non-limiting example, Figure 124 shows the retaining structure 9614 being mounted to a rear wall of a base unit 50.

[001362] The retaining structure 9614 may include a base component 9620 for mounting the retaining structure 9614 to the surface or structure 9650. The retaining structure 9614 may further include two arms (or flanges) 9622, 9624 extending from the base component 9620.

[001363] A first arm 9622 extends from the base component 9620 in a first direction while a second arm 9624 extends from the base component 9620 in a second (different) direction. The first and second arms 9622, 9624 may be configured to or may co-operatively act to retain an elongated item, e.g., a cable, around the base component 9620 (not shown in Figure 123, but see Figure 124).

[001364] The first and second directions may be different directions. In some configurations, the first and second directions may be opposite directions. Nevertheless, it should be appreciated that the first and second directions may be any different directions as long as the arms 9622, 9624 may cooperatively act to retain the elongated item around the base component 9620.

[001365] As a non-limiting example, referring to Figure 124, the retaining structure 9614 may be used to retain a display unit cable 9710 (e.g., a tethering cable) associated with a portable display unit 9720 (which may be any of the portable display units disclosed herein). As further non-limiting examples as shown in Figure 124, the retaining structure 9614 may be used to retain a power cable 9712 (e.g., the power cable of the base unit 50), and a gas (e.g., O2) tube or cable 9714 that may be connected to the base unit 50. Accordingly, the retaining structure 9614 may be a cable retainer.

[001366] As shown in Figure 123, the first arm 9622 and the second arm 9624 may extend at least substantially parallel to the base component 9620.

[001367] Each of the first and second arms 9622, 9624 may project in height from the base component 9620. For example, while the base component 9620 may be mounted, for example, close to or in contact with the surface or structure 9650, the arms 9622, 9624 may be at a distance or spaced apart from the surface or structure 9650.

[001368] As a non-limiting example, as shown in Figure 123, the retaining structure 9614 may include a first securing element 9632 and a second securing element 9634 to secure the elongated item (e.g., cable) that is retained around the base component 9620. However, one securing element may be sufficient. Accordingly, it should be appreciated that the retaining structure 9614 may include at least one securing element to secure the elongated item.

[001369] The first securing element 9632 may be arranged on the first arm 9622, while the second securing element 9634 may be arranged on the second arm 9624.

[001370] The first securing element 9632 may secure the elongated item against the first arm 9622, while the second securing element 9634 may secure the elongated item against the second arm 9624.

[001371] The first securing element 9632 may include a first flange extending in the first direction, while the second securing element 9634 may include a second flange extending in the second direction.

[001372] Each of the first securing element 9632 and the second securing element 9634 may include a hook-like structure to secure the elongated item.

[001373] As described above, the retaining structure 9614 may be a rear-mounted cable-hanger, having main (coiling) flanges 9622, 9624 and smaller

(locking/securing/retention) flanges 9632, 9634. The retaining structure 9614 may be suitable for retaining numerous types of cables comprised in the system.

[001374] The retaining structure 9614, as a rear-mounted hanger, may be helpful in retaining, e.g., the display unit cable 9710, to prevent or minimise risks of accidents. For example, while some of the other cables (which may have one of their anchoring points further up) can potentially be stowed higher up, e.g., on a mounting pole, the display unit cable 9710 is anchored at the portable display unit 9720 and on the base unit 50, i.e., quite low down. So, it may be harder to stretch the display unit cable 9710 up higher for stowage, and may, therefore, be prone to presenting a hazard. Therefore, it may be helpful to retain and secure the display unit cable 9710 using the retaining structure 9614 to minimise risk of accidents.

Breathing assistance apparatus with additional feature(s)

[001375] Figures 125 to 135 show different views of a breathing assistance apparatus having one or more of the features described above in the "External pressure port", "Portable display unit dial", "Button illumination", "Connectors", and "Retaining structure" sections.

[001376] The breathing assistance apparatus includes a base unit 50 as described herein above, and a portable display unit 9820 which may be any one of the portable display units described herein, including, for example, portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000, 6900, 7100, 9500, 9720.

[001377] The breathing assistance apparatus is shown in front perspective views without a portable display unit (Figure 125) and with the portable display unit 9820 connected to the base unit 50 (Figure 126), side views without a portable display unit (Figure 127) and with the portable display unit 9820 connected to the base unit 50 (Figures 128, 129), rear perspective view with the portable display unit 9820 connected to the base unit 50 (Figure 130), rear view with the portable display unit 9820 connected to the base unit 50 (Figure 131), top view with the portable display unit 9820 connected to the base unit 50 (Figure 132), front view with the portable display unit 9820 connected to the base unit 50 (Figure 133), and perspective views with separated portable display unit 9820 and base unit 50 (Figures 134, 135)

[001378] The base unit 50 may include a humidification chamber bay 9808 that may be as described herein in the context of the humidification chamber bay 108.

[001379] The base unit 50 may include a sampling port 9800 that may be as described herein in the context of any one of the pressure prongs 4600, 4700, 4701, 5500. [001380] The base unit 50 may include a connection component 9871 that may be as described in the context of any one of the connection components 2071, 7471, 9271, 9371, 9471.

[001381] There may be a retaining structure 9814 mounted at the rear wall of the base unit 50 that may be as described in the context of the retaining structure 6214, 9614.

[001382] The portable display unit 9820 may include a display unit housing 9801 that may be as described in the context of any one of the display unit housings 3001, 3501, 4001, 6914, 7214, 9501.

[001383] The portable display unit 9820 may include a screen 9816 that may be as described in the context of any one of the screens 3051, 3551, 4051, 6916.

[001384] The portable display unit 9820 may include a dial 9890 that may be as described in the context of the dial D, 6990, 7190, 7290.

[001385] The portable display unit 9820 may include a button 9920 that may be as described in the context of the button 7230.

[001386] The portable display unit 9820 may include an optical element 9850, e.g., a notification light, that may be as described in the context of any one of the notification lights 4150, 4150', 7250, 9550.

[001387] The portable display unit 9820 may include a tethering component 9992 as described herein for tethering the portable display unit 9850 with the base unit 50.

[001388] The portable display unit 9820 may include, at the rear of the display unit housing 9801, a connection component 10771 that may be as described in the context of the connection component 9571.

[001389] The portable display unit 9820 may include, at the rear of the display unit housing 9801, a release feature 10734 that may be as described in the context of the release feature 9534.

[001390] The portable display unit 9820 may include, at the rear of the display unit housing 9801, a retention feature 10730 that may be as described in the context of the retention feature 9530.

[001391] As shown more clearly in Figures 128, 129 and 131, the portable display unit 9820 may provide, at the rear of the display unit housing 9801, hand-grip regions on the right and left sides of the display unit housing 9801. These regions may include suitable patterns or structures 10190, e.g., raised portions or recessed portions, such as in the form of bumps, ridges, ribs, straight lines, wavy lines, etc., to allow a user to better hold or grip the portable display unit 9820. Such structures 10190 may be or act as frictional structures. These structures may also be provided in any one of the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000, 6900, 7100, 9500, 9720 disclosed herein.

[001392] Referring to Figure 135, there is a display unit cable 10810 that may be as described in the context of any one of the cables 3061, 4061.

[001393] Referring to Figure 135, the retaining structure 9814 may retain a power cable 10812 (e.g., that of the base unit 50) around the retaining structure 9814.

[001394] The present disclosure provides a graphical user interface (GUI) displayable on a screen of a display unit (including, for example, any of the portable display units disclosed herein, e.g., portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000, 6900, 7100, 9500, 9720, 9820) to display information, e.g., health information corresponding to or associated with a patient.

[001395] The health information may be or may include respiratory therapy information.

[001396] The health information or parameters thereof may be or may include device settings, respiratory settings, sensor readings, patient parameters (e.g., respiratory rate, SpCh, FiC , etc.), respiratory or therapy modes, therapy settings (e.g., flow rate, pressure, humidity, temperature, target FiO2, target SpC , etc.), etc.

[001397] In some configurations, there may be provided a display unit having a screen, and a graphical user interface (GUI) configured to be displayed on the screen to display health information corresponding to a patient, wherein the graphical user interface is switchable between a plurality of display modes (or is capable of being toggled between a plurality of display modes) to display the health information differently in different display modes of the plurality of display modes.

[001398] In some configurations, the GUI may be switchable between the plurality of display modes in response to a trigger. [001399] The trigger may include at least one of: a user input, a user-proximity parameter that is indicative of a change in a user's viewing distance from the display unit, or a user-proximity parameter that is indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the GUI.

[001400] In some configurations, there may be provided a display unit having a screen, and a graphical user interface (GUI) configured to be displayed on the screen to display health information corresponding to a patient, wherein the graphical user interface is switchable between a plurality of display modes to display the health information differently in different display modes of the plurality of display modes, wherein the GUI is configured to switch between the different display modes in response to a user input, and/or wherein the GUI is configured to automatically switch between the different display modes based at least partly on a user-proximity parameter that is suggestive or representative of a user's viewing distance from the display unit.

[001401] There may be a number of display modes including, for example, different "zoom" modes or views, for the GUI. This may enable the amount of information shown on the screen to be varied depending on whether a user (e.g., a non-patient user) is deemed to be closer to the display unit or further away from the display unit. If a user is determined or perceived or considered to be closer, the screen of the display unit may show more detail; if further away, the screen may show less detail (e.g., (only) essential parameters) visible at a glance when, for example, passing by. Accordingly, the present disclosure may provide zoom GUIs.

[001402] There may be a plurality of display modes or zoom modes or zoom views, for example, two, three, four or any higher number.

[001403] There may be a plurality of predefined distance categories associated with corresponding display modes. For example, a first display mode may be associated with a first predefined distance category, a second display mode may be associated with a second predefined distance category, a third display mode may be associated with a third predefined distance category, etc.

[001404] Using two display modes as a non-limiting example, the predefined distance categories may, for example, include a "near view" (or "close-up view") and a "far view".

[001405] Using three display modes as a non-limiting example, the predefined distance categories may correspond to three "user distances". For example, there may be a first distance category of "bedside" or "near view" or "close-up view", a second distance category of "mid-range" (such as within the patient's room but not bedside), and a third distance category of "passing in the corridor" or "far view".

[001406] As another non-limiting example, there may be three predefined distance categories including, for example, "arms length", "bed space" and "outer bed space", corresponding to different viewpoints for a user. As non-limiting examples, "arms length" may be associated with a distance within 0.7 m from the display unit, "bed space" may be associated with a distance of 0.7 m to 2.0 m from the display unit, and "outer bed space" may be associated with a distance of 2.0 m to 5.0 m from the display unit.

[001407] There may be switching of one display mode to another display mode, by manual toggling by a user and/or automatic switching as will be described further below.

[001408] Using three display modes as a non-limiting example, the switching may be a sequence, for example, from a first display mode to a second display mode, and then to a third display mode, or vice versa. Nevertheless, it may also be possible that the switching may be in any order, for example, switching from the first display mode to the third display mode, or vice versa.

[001409] The health information may be displayed differently in different display modes, for example, in terms of one or more of the following: (i) the level of detail (or amount of detail) of the health information being displayed, (ii) a character size of the health information (or parameters thereof) being displayed, (iii) a layout of the health information being displayed (e.g., arrangement of the information panels the health information is displayed in, arrangement of the parameters of the health information being displayed, etc.), (iv) a number of the information panels the health information is displayed in, (v) a size of the information panels the health information is displayed in, (vi) the number of pages the health information is displayed in, and (vii) a density of the health information being displayed.

[001410] The health information may include one or more characters such as texts, letters, numbers, symbols, signs, marks, icons, graphics, etc.

[001411] The GUI may be customisable to display the health information differently in different display modes. [001412] At least one of a level of detail, density, character size, number of information panel, size of information panels, layout, or number of pages may be customisable.

[001413] The parameters of the health information to be displayed in at least one display mode may be customisable. As non-limiting examples, at least one of a type of the parameters, a number of the parameters, a layout corresponding to the parameters, or a character size of characters corresponding to the parameters, may be customisable.

[001414] The parameters of the health information visible or displayed in respective display or zoom modes may be determined by default, but may also be customisable by a user or viewer.

[001415] Further, within a given display mode, not all parameters necessarily need to be visible at once. For example, the health information or the parameters thereof (or at least some of the health information, or at least some parameters thereof) may be provided across a plurality of pages. The pages displayed may be changeable from one page to another page.

[001416] There may be a change from one page to another page automatically after a certain period of elapsed time.

[001417] There may be a change from one page to another page in response to a user input. For example, a user may be able to change or "swipe" or "carousel" between the plurality of pages.

[001418] A user input may be provided via the GUI (e.g., using a graphical button, a graphical dial, etc., provided by the GUI), a physical input device (e.g., a mechanical button, a mechanical dial, etc.) on the display unit displaying the GUI, or via a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus connected to the base unit.

[001419] The GUI may include a plurality of graphical elements (e.g., icons) operable or selectable by a user to provide the user input. The graphical elements may be or may include touch graphical elements that are activatable or operable or selectable based on user touch interaction with the GUI or the screen.

[001420] The "carousel" functionality may be available in one or more of the display modes. [001421] The number of pages within the "carousel" may differ for different display modes. For example, the number of pages may differ between a "near view" and a "far view" as will be described further below. As a non-limiting example, as the size of the information panels and/or the character size become larger from a "near view" display mode to a "far view" display mode, the number of pages increases from the "near view" display mode to the "far view" display mode.

[001422] The difference(s) in the way the health information is displayed in different display modes may provide, in at least some of the display modes, an expedient patient monitoring "at a glance" type feature. This may also be helpful where the GUI is displayed on a portable display unit which may be hung high up, to allow visibility of the health information from afar.

[001423] Which one of the different display modes may be provided or switched to may depend on a user's viewing distance from the display unit.

[001424] There may be switching of one display mode to another display mode depending on a user's viewing distance from the display unit.

[001425] In some configurations, one or more proximity sensors may be used to detect actual or approximate user distance from the display unit. At least one proximity sensor may be provided with or in a display unit.

[001426] A proximity sensor may be employed to trigger switching between different display modes. As a non-limiting example, when it is determined or sensed, using a proximity sensor, that a user has moved beyond a predetermined distance threshold away from the display unit, the display mode may be switched from a "near view" display mode to a "mid-range" display mode or a "far view" display mode, of from a "mid-range" display mode to a "far view" display mode, depending on the user's initial and final distance from the display mode. As a further non-limiting example, when it is determined or sensed, using a proximity sensor, that a user has moved, past a predetermined distance threshold, from a distance further away towards or closer to the display unit, the display mode may be switched from a "far view" display mode to a "mid-range" display mode or a "near view" display mode, or from a "mid-range" display mode to a "near view" display mode.

[001427] In some configurations, a proximity sensor may be used to trigger waking up of the screen of a display unit (e.g., as a user approaches the display unit) for example, from a sleep mode of the display unit after a prolonged period of screen inactivity. [001428] In some configurations, a time-lapse feature may be employed, whereby a user is deemed to have moved away from the display unit after a certain time of screen inactivity.

[001429] In some configurations, a user may manually toggle between the different display modes. For example, a "display mode" (or "view") button may be provided by the GUI which a user may operate to select the desired display mode, e.g., "near view", "far view", etc.

[001430] As a non-limiting example, a user's viewing distance from the display unit may be defined by a user-proximity parameter. The user-proximity parameter may be determined based on user interaction with the GUI, and/or based on one or more sensors (e.g., proximity sensor and/or motion sensor), as indication of a user's viewing distance relative to the display unit displaying the GUI.

[001431] In some configurations, a user's viewing distance or a user's distance relative to the display unit may be associated with a non-patient user, e.g., a medical professional. In some configuration, the proximity sensor(s) may be directional - i.e., configured and/or arranged to detect the presence or proximity of a user in front of the base unit and/or display unit (e.g., within a certain radius from the proximity sensor), such that the user being detected is most likely to be a supervising medical professional. When in use with a patient, the base unit and/or display unit are likely to be positioned in front of or adjacent to the patient, so the use of directional proximity sensor(s) can help to prevent 'false¹ detection of a user as being in close proximity to the base unit/display unit.

[001432] As a non-limiting example, there may be a lower level of detail of health information displayed if a user is determined or perceived or considered to be further away from the display unit or the screen. For example, only certain essential parameters (e.g., heart rate, respiratory rate, therapy flow rate, etc.) may be displayed so as to enable a user to view or focus on the essential parameters at a glance.

[001433] As a further non-limiting example, the health information may be displayed with a larger character size if a user is determined or perceived or considered to be further away from the display unit or the screen so that the health information may be more easily viewable from afar by the user.

[001434] Switching between different display modes may be automatic and based at least partly on the user-proximity parameter. [001435] Switching between different display modes may be automatic and based at least partly on a predefined distance category (as described above) that is determined based on the user-proximity parameter.

[001436] There may be a plurality of predefined distance categories. A respective display mode may be associated with a respective predefined distance category of the plurality of predefined distance categories.

[001437] In some configurations, at least one of (i) a level of detail, (ii) a character size, (iii) a number of information panels, (iv) a size of information panels, (v) a number of pages, or (vi) a density in relation to the health information to be displayed on the screen in each display mode of the plurality of display modes may be at least partly based on the user-proximity parameter.

[001438] In response to determination of the user-proximity parameter being indicative of a defined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance further away from the display unit, the graphical user interface may automatically switch from one display mode to another display mode involving at least one of a change: (i) from a higher level of detail to a lower level of detail, (ii) from a smaller character size to a larger character size, (iii) from a larger number of information panels to a smaller number of information panels, (iv) from a smaller size of information panels to a larger size of information panels, (v) from a smaller number of pages to a larger number of pages, or (vi) from a higher density to a lower density.

[001439] In response to determination of the user-proximity parameter being indicative of user interaction with the graphical user interface after a last defined period of time of user non-interaction with the graphical user interface, or a change in a user's distance to a defined distance closer to the display unit, the graphical user interface may automatically switch from one display mode to another display mode involving at least one of a change: (i) from a lower level of detail to a higher level of detail, (ii) from a larger character size to a smaller character size, (iii) from a smaller number of information panels to a larger number of information panels, (iv) from a larger size of information panels to a smaller size of information panels, (v) from a larger number of pages to a smaller number of pages, or (vi) from a lower density to a higher density.

[001440] Displaying the health information differently in different display modes may enable the manner in which the health information is to be presented to be tailored or customised depending on the proximity or distance of users to the graphical user interface or the screen. [001441] Displaying the health information differently in different display modes may potentially minimise use of computing resources. For example, when a user is farther away from the screen, the user may not necessarily need to monitor or observe a large number of parameters of the health information, and, therefore, less level of detail of the health information and/or a smaller number of parameters may be displayed when the user is farther away from the screen.

[001442] The display unit having a screen which the GUI described herein may be displayed on may include or may be in data communication with a controller.

[001443] The controller may be operable to control the health information to be displayed by the GUI.

[001444] The controller may be operable to respond to user interaction with the GUI.

[001445] The controller may be a dedicated GUI engine or display controller.

[001446] The controller may be integrated with or part of or in data communication with a controller of a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

[001447] The controller may be a software application executable on the controller of the base unit.

[001448] The display unit having a screen which the GUI described herein may be displayed on may be part of a breathing assistance apparatus having a base unit.

[001449] The base unit may include a controller configured to receive data indicative of the health information and transmit the data to the display unit for displaying the health information on the GUI on the screen.

[001450] The present disclosure may further provide a computer-implemented method for a display unit, the method including displaying, on a screen of the display unit, a graphical user interface displaying health information corresponding to a patient, and switching between a plurality of display modes, wherein the method further comprises displaying the health information differently in different display modes of the plurality of display modes.

[001451] It should be appreciated that description in the context of the GUI provided herein may correspondingly be applicable in relation to the computer- implemented method. [001452] Figures 136 to 162 show non-limiting examples of graphical user interfaces (GUIs) displayable on a screen of a display unit, which may be any one of the portable display units described herein above.

[001453] While some of the GUIs may be described below with reference to a particular therapy mode, it should be appreciated that any one of the GUIs described herein may be provided or applicable in or for any operating mode or therapy mode, for example, high-flow therapy, nasal high flow therapy mode, bi-level positive airway pressure mode, etc.

[001454] While two or more features of the GUIs may be described in combination with reference to a particular configuration or a particular figure, it should be appreciated that each of the features may be a stand-alone feature.

[001455] While one or more certain features of the GUIs may be described with reference to a particular configuration or a particular figure, it should be appreciated that any one of the certain features may be applicable to another configuration.

[001456] Figures 136 and 137 show non-limiting examples of a GUI 10900 in different display modes displaying health information. The GUI 10900 shows the relevant health information or the parameters thereof for a breathing assistance apparatus set for high-flow therapy.

[001457] The health information may be displayed in a plurality of information panels (or information blocks or information segments) 10901, 10902, 10903, 10904, 10905, 10906. It should be appreciated that any number of information panels may be provided. The number of information panels may be customisable.

[001458] Different parameters 10911, 10912, 10913, 10914, 10915, 10916 of the health information may be displayed. As non-limiting examples, temperature 10913 and heart rate 10916 and their corresponding values may be displayed. As a nonlimiting example, the temperature 10913 shows the temperature of the (humidified) gases flow. It should be appreciated that any number of parameters may be provided. The number of parameters may be customisable.

[001459] As a non-limiting example, a respective parameter 10911, 10912, 10913, 10914, 10915, 10916 and its corresponding value may be displayed in a respective information panel 10901, 10902, 10903, 10904, 10905, 10906. [001460] As a non-limiting example, the display mode of Figure 136 may be a "near view" display mode, while the display mode of Figure 137 may be a "far view" display mode.

[001461] The display mode of Figure 136 may be switched to the display mode of Figure 137, and vice versa.

[001462] As a non-limiting example, the display mode of the GUI 10900 as shown in Figure 136 may be provided where a user is determined or perceived to be close or relatively closer to the display unit displaying the GUI 10900. The display mode of the GUI 10900 as shown in Figure 137 may be provided where a user is determined or perceived to be away or further away from the display unit displaying the GUI 10900.

[001463] As a further non-limiting example, the display mode of the GUI 10900 as shown in Figure 137 may be provided after a defined period of elapsed time of last user interaction with the GUI. Such a period of user inactivity with the GUI may be considered or perceived or interpreted to mean that the user may be away or further away from the display unit displaying the GUI 10900. Subsequently, if a user starts interacting with the GUI 10900, there may be a switch to the display mode of the GUI 10900 as shown in Figure 136.

[001464] As a further non-limiting example, the display mode as shown in Figure 136 may be the default mode provided while a user is interacting with the GUI 10900.

[001465] The display mode of Figure 136 may be switched to the display mode of Figure 137, and vice versa, based at least partly on the user-proximity parameter described above.

[001466] Comparing the display modes of Figures 136 and 137, the level of detail and/or the density of the health information being displayed in the display mode of Figure 136 is higher compared to that for the display mode of Figure 137.

[001467] The character size of the health information being displayed in the display mode of Figure 136 is smaller compared to that for the display mode of Figure 137. For example, the values "60", "30", and "90" for respective parameters 10911, 10912 and 10915 are larger for the display mode of Figure 137.

[001468] The number of information panels the health information is displayed in is larger in the display mode of Figure 136 compared to that for the display mode of Figure 137. For example, the information panel 10906 has been omitted in the display mode of Figure 137.

[001469] The size of the information panels the health information is displayed in is smaller in the display mode of Figure 136 compared to that for the display mode of Figure 137. See, for example, the information panels 10904, 10905 that are larger in the display mode of Figure 137.

[001470] It may also be observed that the health information is displayed in different layouts in the different display modes of Figures 136 and 137.

[001471] In each display mode, at least a portion of the health information may be displayed across a plurality of pages.

[001472] The number of pages may be different in different display modes. As a non-limiting example, the health information on the bottom portion of the screen may be displayed across three pages 10920 in the display mode of Figure 136 compared to four pages 10921 in the display mode of Figure 137 (because the respective information panels (e.g., 10904, 10905) are each larger and thus are spread across more pages). Each page may be viewable one at a time. The pages 10920, 10921 may be changeable or scrollable from one page to another page.

[001473] The difference in the number of pages may be customised by a user and/or may, for example, be a result of a difference in the display or presentation of the health information in the different display modes in terms of at least one of a level of detail, density, character size, number of information panel, or layout.

[001474] Figures 138 to 141 show further non-limiting examples of a GUI 11100 in different display modes displaying health information. The GUI 11100 shows the relevant health information or the parameters thereof for a breathing assistance apparatus set to a nasal high flow mode.

[001475] The display modes of Figure 138 to 140 may correspond respectively to, for example, a "near view" (e.g., where a user may be close by), a "mid-range" view (e.g., where a user may be at a short distance away), and a "far view" (e.g., where a user may be further or far away).

[001476] The level of detail and/or the density of the health information being displayed may be different in different display modes. For example, the level of detail and/or the density of the health information being displayed decreases from the "near view" display mode (Figure 138) to the "mid-range" display mode (Figure 139), and then to the "far view" display mode (Figure 140). Therefore, a more detailed display mode may be provided for when the user is close by (see Figure 138) and a less detailed display mode may be provided for when the user is further away (see Figure 140).

[001477] Comparing the "far view" display mode to the "near view" display mode and the "mid-range" display mode, the "far view" display mode skims off some of the less essential parameters (e.g., temperature 11111), and may also omit one or more of the waveform graphs.

[001478] In some configurations, the "far view" display mode may have icons (e.g., lung icon 11131, heart icon 11132) so the user can tell, at a glance, which parameters the numbers are referring to.

[001479] The layouts of the health information being displayed may be different in each of the "near view" display mode, "mid-range" display mode, and "far view" display mode.

[001480] The number of parameters of the health information being displayed may be different in different display modes. For example, the number of parameters (e.g., temperature 11111, flow 11112, etc.) of the health information being displayed decreases from the "near view" display mode to the "mid-range" display mode, and then to the "far view" display mode.

[001481] The number of information panels in which the health information is displayed may be different in different display modes. For example, the number of information panels (see, for example, information panels 11101, 11102, 11103, 11104) in which the health information is displayed decreases from the "near view" display mode to the "mid-range" display mode, and then to the "far view" display mode.

[001482] The size of the information panels which the health information is displayed in may be different in different display modes. For example, the size of the information panels 11102, 11104 which the health information is displayed in increases from the "mid-range" display mode to the "far view" display mode.

[001483] The character size of the health information being displayed may be different in different display modes. For example, the character size of the number associated with the parameter in the information panel 11104 increases from the "midrange" display mode to the "far view" display mode. [001484] Figure 141 shows the GUI 11100 being displayed on the screen 11116 of a portable display unit 11120. The portable display unit may be, for example, any one of the portable display units 3000, 3500, 4000, 6900, 7100, 9500, 9720, 9820. Figure 141 illustrates a different layout of the displayed health information that may be adopted for any display mode.

[001485] Figure 142 shows a non-limiting example of a GUI 11500 in a "more detailed" zoom view, e.g., a "near view" display mode, showing the relevant health information or the parameters thereof for a breathing assistance apparatus set to a bilevel positive airway pressure mode (pressure-based therapy). Similar techniques as described above in the context of the GUI 10900, 11100 may be employed for the different display modes of the GUI 11500, although some of the parameters of the health information being displayed may be different.

[001486] In some configurations, a user may be able to customise what the user wishes to see in each display mode, for a given therapy type (and use case). As nonlimiting examples, the user may be able to set up a "profile" (e.g., comprising a set of viewer preferences) specific to a defined condition, e.g., a given ward, a given patient, etc.

[001487] Examples of the customisation by a user may be that, for example, for the "distant/far view" display mode, the user might decide there is no need for patient SpO₂ to be displayed. Additionally, or alternatively, the user may decide to customise the heart rate (HR) information panel to be larger and/or more prominent than the other parameters, for example, by making the character size larger and/or the size of the information panel larger.

[001488] The changes may be made at the "configuration/customization" stage, which then apply when the breathing assistance apparatus or system is in use for that user.

[001489] Figures 143 to 145 illustrate customisation options for a GUI 11600 for the profile "Ward" 11640. Figure 143 shows selection of the profile "Ward" 11640. Figure 144 shows the customisation for a "near view" display mode 11650 for the profile "Ward" 11640, while Figure 145 shows the customisation for a "far view" display mode 11652 for the profile "Ward" 11640.

[001490] Comparing the "far view" display mode 11652 to the "near view" display mode 11650, the respiratory rate 11601 (or the corresponding information panel) has been omitted, while the character size or the size of the values for the heart rate 11611 and SpO₂ 11612 has been enlarged.

[001491] Figures 146 and 147 show two non-limiting examples of GUIs 11900, 12000 with different layouts for the displayed health information. The layouts may be customisable. Similar techniques as described above in the context of the GUI 10900, 11100 may be employed for the different display modes for the GUIs 11900, 12000, meaning that for a "near view" display mode, more of the health information or parameters thereof may be visible simultaneously on one page than for a "far" zoom view.

[001492] In some configurations, within a given display mode or view, all the parameters may not necessarily fit a single page or have to be on a single page. Rather, the health information or the parameters thereof (or at least some of the health information or at least some of the parameters thereof) may be provided across a plurality of pages, and a user may scroll or toggle between the pages in a "carousel" fashion (e.g., by swiping on the touchscreen or using buttons). Scrolling between the pages may be done manually by the user, or the system can be configured (including being configured by a user) to automatically scroll from one page to the next at preset intervals.

[001493] Figures 148 and 149 show, schematically, non-limiting examples of a GUI 12100 in different display modes or zoom views. As a non-limiting example, the display mode of the GUI 12100 shown in Figure 148 may correspond to a "near view" or "close-up view" display mode for when a user is close by the display unit displaying the GUI 12100 or the user being by the bed, while the display mode of the GUI 12100 shown in Figure 149 may correspond to a "mid-range" display mode, or a "passing in the corridor" (or "far view") display mode for when a user is farther away from the display unit, e.g., passing in the corridor.

[001494] Figures 148 and 149 illustrate a manner in which the health information may be displayed differently in different display modes using information panels of different sizes. In other words, there is a change in the size of the information panels (or blocks or segments) between the different display modes or views.

[001495] As will be described below, a plurality of parameters of the health information may be displayed in each display mode. Each parameter may be displayed in a respective information panel. [001496] Additionally or optionally, a "bifurcated screen" (e.g., comprising a static and a scrollable portion) feature may be incorporated. In one or more display modes, there may be a main window (or main region) 12162 and a secondary window (or secondary region) 12164 for displaying health information. The main window 12162 and the secondary window 12164 may be distinct from one another.

[001497] In some configurations, the main window 12162 may be a static window (or scroll-free or non-scrollable window) where all of the information assigned to the main window 12162 is displayed concurrently, without the need to scroll to see some segments of the information, while the secondary window 12164 may be a scrollable window where health information may be provided across a number of pages and the pages are scrollable to change from one page to another page, and, consequently, the health information being displayed. A user may scroll through the pages.

[001498] Description in relation to Figures 148 and 149 is provided below based on the non-limiting example of each display mode displaying 10 parameters. Nevertheless, it should be appreciated that any number of parameters may be displayed.

[001499] The overall number of parameters to be displayed may be customisable.

[001500] The number of parameters to be displayed in one or both of the main window 12162 and the secondary window 12164 may be customisable.

[001501] Referring to Figure 148, the parameters may be displayed in a defined arrangement or according to a rule (e.g., a default rule or a user-customised rule) such that in the "close-up view" display mode, parameters "1" to "6" are in the main window 12162, and the remaining four parameters "7" to "10" are in the secondary window 12164. Parameters "1" to "9", as shown in Figure 148, may be arranged or displayed in respective information panels (or blocks or segments) 12111, 12112, 12113, 12114, 12115, 12116, 12117, 12118, 12119. Since the user is nearby, the secondary (scrollable) window 12164 may be set up to show three parameters per page at any one time (e.g., based on a default rule or a user-customised rule), meaning that two scrollable pages 12130 are needed to display parameters "7" to "10". In this way, the current page 1 as shown in Figure 148 may display parameters "7" to "9", and page 2 may display parameter "10".

[001502] Referring to Figure 149, the 10 parameters may be displayed in a defined arrangement or according to a rule (e.g., a default rule or a user-customised rule) such that in the "far view" display mode, parameters "1" to "4" in information panels 12111, 12112, 12113, 12114 are in the main window 12162, and the remaining six parameters are in the secondary (scrollable) window 12164. In the "far view" display mode, the secondary window 12164 may be set up to show only two parameters per page (e.g., based on a default rule or a user-customised rule) at a time in the secondary window 12164 in order to be sufficiently large to be visible from afar. Consequently, three scrollable pages 12230 are needed to display parameters "5" to "10". In this way, the current page 1 as shown in Figure 149 may display parameters "5" and "6", page 2 may display parameters "7" and "8", and page 3 may display parameters "9" and "10".

[001503] As described above, the number of the information panels 12111, 12112, 12113, 12114, 12115, 12116, 12117, 12118, 12119 displayable at any one time may differ. Comparing Figures 148 and 149, the number of the information panels 12111, 12112, 12113, 12114, 12115, 12116, 12117, 12118, 12119 displayable at any one time decreases from the "near view" display mode to the "far view" display mode.

[001504] As illustratively shown in Figures 148 and 149, the size of the information panels 12111, 12112, 12113, 12114, 12115, 12116, 12117, 12118, 12119 may differ. For example, the information panels 121111, 12112, 12113, 12115, 12116 increase in size from the "near view" display mode to the "far view" display mode.

[001505] Further, as described above, the scroll size or the number of pages 12130, 12230 increases from the "near view" display mode to the "far view" display mode.

[001506] It should be appreciated that, as the size of the information panels 12111, 12112, 12113, 12114, 12115, 12116, 12117, 12118, 12119 increases, there may be an increase in the character size corresponding to the parameters being displayed.

[001507] As described above, in some configurations, there may be a display for a screen associated with a respiratory therapy device, the display being configured to display a plurality of respiratory therapy parameters in a first and second view (see, for example, Figures 148 and 149), the first view (see, for example, Figure 148) being different from the second view (see, for example, Figure 149), the first view being suitable for viewing by a user closer to the screen than the second view. In the first view, a first subset of the plurality of parameters is displayed on a main portion (see, for example, main window 12162) of the display screen, and the remaining parameters are displayed on a secondary portion (see, for example, secondary window 12164) of the display screen. In the second view, a third subset of the plurality of parameters is displayed on the main portion of the display screen, and the remaining parameters are displayed on the secondary portion of the display screen. The first subset comprises a greater number of parameters than the third subset. The display is configured to switch between the first and second views upon occurrence of a trigger.

[001508] In the second view, each parameter may occupy a larger portion of the screen than in the first view.

[001509] The parameters displayed on the main portion may be displayed in block or segment form, and the blocks or segments in the second view may be larger than the blocks or segments in the first view. The blocks or segments may be information panels.

[001510] The second portion of the display screen may be a scrollable portion comprising a plurality of pages selectively scrollable by a user, each page displaying a subset of the remaining parameters.

[001511] In the first view, each page of the scrollable portion may display a greater number of the remaining parameters than in the second view.

[001512] In the second view, there may be a greater number of pages in the scrollable portion than in the first view.

[001513] The trigger may be a predetermined period of elapsed time since last user interaction with the screen.

[001514] The trigger may be a manual input by a user.

[001515] The trigger may be a signal from a proximity sensor indicating a change in a distance of the user from the screen.

[001516] In some configurations, the displayed health information may be segregated into different portions or regions in one or more of the display modes according to the type or category or nature of the health information. In this way, there may be distinct portions, each portion corresponding to health information of a defined type.

[001517] Health information of a first type may be displayed in a first region of the GUI while health information of a second (different) type may be displayed in a second region of the GUI. [001518] As a non-limiting example, there may be a set portion and a dynamic portion. The set portion may correspond to health information or parameters thereof having set or assigned values, for example, as set or imposed by a clinician, e.g., gases flow temperature, pressure, flow rate, etc. The dynamic portion may correspond to health information or parameters thereof having dynamic values, for example, those measured from the patient, e.g., respiratory rate, heart rate, pulse oximetry readings, etc. Accordingly, there may be two distinct portions, one for set values and one for dynamic values.

[001519] Referring to the GUI 12300 of Figure 150, there may be a left portion 12352 defined as the set portion, and a right portion 12354 defined as the dynamic portion.

[001520] Other options may be possible. Using the GUI 10900 as illustrated in Figure 136 as a non-limiting example, the top portion (i.e., upper half portion) having parameters 10911, 10912, 10913 may be defined as the set portion, while the bottom portion (i.e., lower half portion) having parameters 10914, 10915, 10916 may be defined as the dynamic portion.

[001521] In some configurations, apart from or in addition to the display modes, one or more of the GUIs described herein may provide other viewing options and/or a range of different panels and/or tabs where settings may be entered or changed.

[001522] As a non-limiting example, referring to Figures 151 and 152, there may be a "graphs" or "stats" menu tab 12420. There may be two sub-tabs under the tab 12420, e.g., a "Patient data" sub-tab 12422 which shows live stats as they currently are as illustrated in Figure 151, and a "Trending graphs" sub-tab 12424 for showing graphs plotting past data/trends. The "Trending graphs" sub-tab 12424 may, in turn, lead to two subsections, for example, a "short-term" subsection and a "longterm" subsection as shown in Figure 152.

[001523] Referring to Figure 153, in some configurations, one or more of the GUIs described herein may include a "quick access" tab 12620 on the top level of the GUI, for quick access to common settings such as display brightness 12622 and audio volume 12624.

[001524] In some configurations, a range of panels may be provided in one or more of the GUIs described herein for entering and/or changing settings for different parameters, criteria, etc., including, for example, therapy type selection as shown in Figure 154, flow rate selection as shown in Figure 155, SpO? alarm threshold as shown in Figure 156, FiC and SpCh bracket selection as shown in Figure 157, and FiC alarm as shown in Figure 158. As a non-limiting example, Figure 154 shows therapy type options of Nasal High Flow 15401, BiLevel ST 15402, BiLevel PCV 15403, and CPAP 15404.

[001525] Selecting and/or changing a setting may be done via a graphical sliding bar as a form of graphical adjustment tool (or graphical adjustment mechanism) provided by the GUI. However, other types of adjustment tools or other input options may be provided.

[001526] Operation of the graphical sliding bar may be via a single option or input element, or via one of a number of possible options or input elements as will be described further below.

[001527] Referring to Figure 155 as a non-limiting example, a graphical linear sliding bar 12870 may be provided for entering and/or changing the flow rate. The graphical linear sliding bar 12870 includes a scale 12872, and an indicator 12874 movable or slidable along the scale 12872. The graphical linear sliding bar 12870 has a range length relative to the scale 12872, which may be, for example, a range from 10 to 70 L/min as shown in Figure 155. A user may operate the graphical linear sliding bar 12870 to move the indicator 12874 to a position on the scale 12872 corresponding to the desired setting, which, as shown in Figure 155, may be, for example, 44 L/min.

[001528] A graphical linear sliding bar 12970 may be provided for the SpC alarm as shown in Figure 156. The graphical linear sliding bar 12970 may be as described in the context of the graphical linear sliding bar 12870. In the example shown in Figure 156, the graphical linear sliding bar 12970 is arranged horizontally, although it may also be arranged vertically, similar to the graphical linear sliding bar 12870 in other configurations.

[001529] Referring to Figure 157, a graphical linear sliding bar 13070 may be provided for FiC and another graphical linear sliding bar 13072 for SpC . Each of the graphical linear sliding bars 13070, 13072 may be as described in the context of the graphical linear sliding bar 12870.

[001530] A graphical linear sliding bar 13170 may be provided for the FiC alarm as shown in Figure 158. The graphical linear sliding bar 13170 may be as described in the context of the graphical linear sliding bar 12870. [001531] It should be appreciated that the desired setting may be a single value 12876, 13176 for example, 44 L/min as shown in Figure 155 and 99% as shown in Figure 158, or a value range 13076, 13078, for example, 43-63 % for FiO2, and 87- 94 % for SpO2 as shown in Figure 157.

[001532] It should be appreciated that a graphical (linear) sliding bar may have a preset range/band length (with fixed end limits) or may have one or more end limits that may be separately adjustable (or customisable) such that the range/band length is also adjustable.

[001533] Each of the graphical linear sliding bars 12870, 12970, 13070, 13072, 13170 has a predetermined range length with fixed end limits. In this way, a single movable block or element may be defined for each of the graphical linear sliding bars 12870, 12970, 13070, 13072, 13170 such that a single value 12876, 13176, or a predetermined range/width of values 13076, 13078 may be selected. As a non-limiting example, the graphical linear sliding bar 12870 has a fixed upper limit of 70 L/min and a fixed lower limit of 10 L/min. Nevertheless, in some configurations, it should be appreciated that any one of the graphical linear sliding bars 12870, 12970, 13070, 13072, 13170 may have one or more adjustable end limits.

[001534] Figure 159 shows a non-limiting example of a graphical linear sliding bar 13270 with a scale 13272, an indicator 13274 slidable along the scale 13272, and individually adjustable fields or blocks 13276, 13278 corresponding to the lower and upper end limits of the range length of the graphical linear sliding bar 13270. A user may set or change the value in the adjustable field 13276 to set the lower end, and/or the value in the adjustable field 13278 to set the upper end. Accordingly, the end limits of the range length may be independently adjustable to customise the range length.

[001535] It should be appreciated that a graphical sliding bar may be provided in the form of a graphical linear sliding bar (e.g., graphical linear sliding bars 12870, 12970, 13070, 13072, 13170, 13270), or a graphical non-linear or circular or curved sliding bar 13370, 13470 as shown in Figures 160 to 161.

[001536] Each graphical curved sliding bar 13370, 13470 includes a scale 13372, 13472, and an indicator 13374, 13474 movable or slidable along the scale 13372, 13472. Each graphical curved sliding bar 13370, 13470 has a range length relative to the scale 13372, 13472. A user may operate the graphical curved sliding bar 13370, 13470 to move the indicator 13374, 13474 to a position on the scale 13372, 13472 corresponding to the desired setting. [001537] As with the graphical linear (or straight) sliding bars 12870, 12970, 13070, 13072, 13170, 13270, the graphical curved sliding bars 13370, 13470 may be a single element (with fixed end limits) that a user "grabs" and slides. Or, the graphical curved sliding bars 13370, 13470 may have a separately adjustable top (upper) and bottom (lower) end limits, such that both the top end of the range and the bottom end of the range may be adjusted (and the size of the range length may thus also be adjusted).

[001538] It should be appreciated that a graphical sliding bar with fixed end limits and/or a graphical sliding bar with adjustable end limits may be provided in one or more or each display mode.

[001539] In some configurations, a graphical sliding bar may be displayed in a first portion (or region or section) of the GUI, while the current health information or parameters thereof or the parameter associated with the graphical sliding bar is displayed in a second portion (or region or section) of the GUI. In this way, the GUI may display the current health information (or current parameters thereof) in the second portion for easy reference while a user operates the at least one sliding bar to adjust a certain parameter.

[001540] Referring to the GUI of Figure 162 as a non-limiting example, the current health information or the current values of the parameters of the health information, for example, SpC , heart rate (HR), respiratory rate (RR), and volume, may be displayed on the right-hand side portion of the GUI for user's convenience while a user operates the graphical linear sliding bar 13570 provided in the middle portion or outside of the right-hand side portion of the GUI to adjust another parameter or a main parameter, e.g., flow target. As the user operates the graphical linear sliding bar 13570, the values shown on the right-hand side portion of the GUI may not or do not change.

[001541] It should be appreciated that any one feature in relation to the manner that the health information may be displayed differently in different display modes, e.g., level of detail, character size, number of information panels, etc. may be a standalone feature. In other words, such features may be independent of one another. Further, only a single such feature may be employed in one or more configurations of the GUI, e.g., only the level of detail is changed for different display modes.

[001542] It should be appreciated that any one feature in relation to the manner that the health information may be displayed differently in different display modes (e.g., level of detail, character size, number of information panels, etc.) may be provided alone or in combination with any other one or more such features.

[001543] It should be appreciated that while a plurality of features in relation to the manner that the health information may be displayed differently in different display modes may be described above in relation to a particular GUI, nevertheless, one or more features of the plurality of features may be omitted. For example, while a particular GUI may be described such that both the number of information panels and the size of the information panels may be different for different display modes, it should be appreciated that these may not necessarily be employed in combination. It is possible that the feature in relation to the number of information panels or the feature in relation to the size of the information panels may be omitted.

[001544] It should be appreciated that a feature described above in relation to a particular GUI or a particular configuration of the GUI may be applicable to any other GUIs or configurations thereof.

Graohical adjustment tool

[001545] The present disclosure may provide a GUI having a graphical adjustment tool (or graphical adjustment mechanism) that may be manipulated or operated by a user to adjust a therapy setting or parameter. For example, a level of a parameter associated with a breathing therapy (or respiratory therapy) to be provided by a breathing assistance apparatus may be adjustable in response to a user input indicative of manipulation of the graphical adjustment tool.

[001546] The user may operate the graphical adjustment tool via a number of different input elements or features. This may provide a multi-mode adjustability function.

[001547] The graphical adjustment tool may be provided by a GUI that may be displayed on a screen of a display unit (including, for example, any of the portable display units disclosed herein, e.g., portable display unit 3000, 3500, 4000, 6900, 7100, 9500, 9720, 9820).

[001548] In some configurations, the graphical adjustment tool may include a plurality of regions, where each region corresponds to a different level of a parameter or parameter setting. A user may select a region of the plurality of regions so as to select a corresponding level of the parameter setting. [001549] In some configurations, the present disclosure may provide a display unit having a screen, a display unit housing supporting the screen, and a graphical user interface configured to be displayed on the screen, wherein the display unit is configured to communicate with a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus, wherein the graphical user interface comprises a graphical adjustment tool, wherein a level of a parameter associated with a breathing therapy to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus is adjustable in response to a user input indicative of manipulation of the graphical adjustment tool, and wherein the display unit is configured for a user to provide the user input via a plurality of different input elements. The display unit may be a portable display unit configured to removably connect to the base unit.

[001550] The graphical adjustment tool may be any suitable adjustment tool, for example, in the form of a graphical sliding bar operable by a user, or in the form of graphical discrete regions or points (e.g., square-like shaped regions) selectable by a user.

[001551] The graphical sliding bar may be any one of the graphical linear sliding bars or any one of the graphical curved sliding bars described in the GUI section above.

[001552] The graphical sliding bar may have a range length with fixed end limits (e.g., as a single block) or a range length that may be customisable through separately adjustable upper and lower end limits.

[001553] A plurality of different input elements may be provided for operating the graphical adjustment tool. Using a graphical sliding bar as a non-limiting example, the input elements may include but not limited to: (i) a touchscreen, by physically engaging and dragging (or sliding) the indicator of the graphical sliding bar along the scale of the graphical sliding bar, (ii) via buttons (e.g., "+" and buttons) operable or selectable by a user, and (Hi) via a dial rotatable by a user. Two or more of the above-mentioned input elements may be provided.

[001554] The touchscreen functionality may allow a user to physically contact the touchscreen at or proximate to a region of the GUI where the graphical sliding bar is arranged so as to operate the graphical sliding bar.

[001555] The buttons for operating or manipulating the graphical sliding bar may include physical buttons (e.g., on a display unit housing of the display unit) and/or graphical buttons provided by the GUI. A user may incrementally increase or decrease the level of the parameter setting by operating the corresponding buttons. As non- limiting examples, a user may operate or press a first button, e.g., a "+" or "up-arrow" or "right-arrow" button, to increase the level of the parameter, and a second (different) button, e.g., a or "down-arrow" or "left-arrow" button, to decrease the level of the parameter.

[001556] The dial for operating or manipulating the graphical sliding bar may include a physical dial (e.g., on a display unit housing of the display unit) and/or a graphical dial provided by the GUI. The physical dial may be any of the dials D, 6990, 7190, 7290, 9890 described herein above. The physical dial may be provided or arranged at or near the bottom of the display unit housing.

[001557] A user may incrementally increase the level of the parameter by turning the dial in a first rotational direction, e.g., a clockwise direction, and may incrementally decrease the level of the parameter by turning the dial in a second (reverse or different) rotational direction, e.g., a counter-clockwise direction.

[001558] To operate the dial to manipulate the graphical sliding bar, the corresponding graphical sliding bar may first be selected, and the dial may then be rotated or turned to operate the graphical sliding bar.

[001559] The parameter or parameter setting may be or may include a therapy setting.

[001560] The parameter or parameter setting that may be adjusted may include but not limited to flow, pressure, fraction of inspired oxygen, temperature, blood oxygen saturation.

[001561] In some configurations, there may be a plurality of graphical adjustment tools provided by the GUI where each graphical adjustment tool may correspond to a respective parameter or parameter setting. In this way, a level of the respective parameter may be adjusted by a user operating the corresponding graphical adjustment tool.

[001562] The plurality of graphical adjustment tools may include a single graphical adjustment tool type (e.g., graphical sliding bar), or a combination of different types (e.g., graphical sliding bar and graphical discrete regions).

[001563] The plurality of graphical adjustment tools may be selectively displayable on the screen by a user, e.g., depending on the parameter(s) to be adjusted. [001564] It should be appreciated that the above-mentioned input elements and any other suitable input elements may also be used for operating any suitable graphical adjustment tools other than a graphical sliding bar.

[001565] In some configurations, a graphical adjustment tool for enabling adjusting of a parameter setting of a respiratory therapy apparatus may be provided, the graphical adjustment tool being displayed on a display screen of a display screen module of the respiratory therapy apparatus, the display screen module having a display screen housing, the graphical adjustment tool comprising a plurality of regions, each region corresponding to a different level of the parameter setting, the display screen module being configured to enable a user to select a region of the plurality of regions so as to select a level of the parameter setting, the display screen module being configured to enable said user selection via a plurality of different user input elements. Said plurality of user input elements may include two or more of the input elements described herein above.

[001566] Reference to any prior art in this specification is not, and should not be taken as, an acknowledgement or any form of suggestion that the prior art forms part of the common general knowledge in the field of endeavour in any country in the world.

[001567] Where reference is used herein to directional terms such as 'up', 'down', 'forward', 'rearward', 'horizontal', 'vertical' etc, those terms refer to when the apparatus is in a typical in-use position and/or with reference to particular orientations shown in the figures, and are used to show and/or describe relative directions or orientations.

[001568] The devices disclosed herein may have any one or more of the features and/or functionality described in WO 2022/144737 and US patent application no. 18/259,164. The contents of those specifications are incorporated herein in their entirety by way of reference.

[001569] Although the present disclosure has been described in terms of certain embodiments, other embodiments apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art also are within the scope of this disclosure. Thus, various changes and modifications may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the disclosure. For instance, various components may be repositioned as desired. Features from any of the described embodiments may be combined with each other and/or an apparatus may comprise one, more, or all of the features of the above-described embodiments. Moreover, not all of the features, aspects and advantages are necessarily required to practice the present disclosure. Accordingly, the scope of the present disclosure is intended to be defined only by the claims that follow.

[001570] The various configurations described are exemplary configurations only.

Any one or more features from any of the configurations may be used in combination with any one or more features from any of the other configurations.

Claims

1. A breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit configured to provide a flow of gases; a humidifier for humidifying the flow of gases; and at least one sampling port coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, the at least one sampling port being configured to connect with a sampling line associated with a patient, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to, when a portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

2. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein the humidifier comprises a humidification chamber configured to receive a liquid.

3. A breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; a portable display unit configured to removably connect to the base unit; and at least one sampling port coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, the at least one sampling port being configured to connect with a sampling line associated with a patient, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to, when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

4. A breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and at least one sampling port coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, the at least one sampling port being configured to connect with a sampling line associated with a patient, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to, when a portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit, and wherein the breathing assistance apparatus is capable of providing at least one of a high flow therapy or a pressure-based therapy to the patient.

5. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the at least one sampling port is coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit at a part of the base unit allowing the at least one sampling port to be accessible and to minimise interference with the portable display unit when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit.

6. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the at least one sampling port is coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit in an orientation allowing the at least one sampling port to be accessible and to minimise interference with the portable display unit when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit.

7. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the at least one sampling port is pivotably coupled to or configured to pivotably couple to the base unit.

8. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the at least one sampling port is rotatably coupled to or configured to rotatably couple to the base unit.

9. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to engage with a complementary port provided with the sampling line.

10. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to removably couple to the base unit, and wherein the base unit comprises a connector port configured to engage with the at least one sampling port.

11. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 10, further comprising a lid configured to cover the connector port.

12. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 11, further comprising a cover configured to cover an end region of the at least one sampling port that is configured to connect with the sampling line.

13. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the at least one sampling port is foldable.

14. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the at least one sampling port comprises an optically transparent material.

15. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 14, configured for the at least one sampling port to be illuminated by the base unit in response to determination of an operating mode of the breathing assistance apparatus requiring connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line.

16. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 15, further configured to turn off illumination of the at least one sampling port in response to determination of connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line.

17. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 15 or 16, further configured to turn off illumination of the at least one sampling port after a defined period of time.

18. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 14 to 17, configured for the at least one sampling port to be illuminated by the base unit in response to determination of a connection error with the sampling line.

19. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 18, wherein a recess is defined in the base unit to receive the at least one sampling port.

20. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 19, wherein the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a covering configured to cover the recess, and wherein the covering is configured to allow the at least one sampling port to extend through the covering.

21. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 19 or 20, further comprising an electrical circuit within the recess or removably receivable within the recess, the electrical circuit being configured to operatively communicate with the at least one sampling port.

22. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 21, wherein the electrical circuit is further configured to operatively communicate with a controller of the base unit.

23. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 21 or 22, further comprising an intermediate connection component arranged within the recess or removably receivable within the recess to operatively communicate with the at least one sampling port and the electrical circuit.

24. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 21 to 23, wherein the electrical circuit comprises a sensor arrangement.

25. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 24, wherein the sensor arrangement comprises at least one pressure sensor.

26. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 25, wherein the sampling line comprises a gases sampling line, and wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to connect with the gases sampling line to convey a gases flow from the gases sampling line to the base unit.

27. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 26, wherein a quantity of the at least one sampling port arranged to connect with corresponding sampling lines for a therapy session for the patient is selectively configurable based on a breathing therapy mode to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus corresponding to the therapy session.

28. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 27, further comprising a plurality of sampling ports coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, wherein the plurality of sampling ports are configured to, when a portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

29. A breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and a plurality of sampling ports coupled to or configured to removably couple to the base unit, each sampling port of the plurality of sampling ports being configured to connect with a respective sampling line associated with a patient, wherein a quantity of the plurality of sampling ports arranged to connect with corresponding sampling lines for a therapy session for the patient is selectively configurable based on a breathing therapy mode to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus corresponding to the therapy session.

30. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 29, further comprising at least one cover, wherein a respective cover of the at least one cover is configured to cover an end region of a respective sampling port of the plurality of sampling ports that is to be unused for the therapy session.

31. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 29 or 30, wherein the plurality of sampling ports are configured to removably couple to the base unit, and wherein the base unit comprises a plurality of connector ports configured to correspondingly engage with the plurality of sampling ports.

32. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 31, further comprising at least one lid, wherein a respective lid of the at least one lid is configured to cover a respective connector port of the plurality of connector ports that is to be unused for the therapy session.

33. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 29 to 32, further comprising a portable display unit configured to removably connect to the base unit.

34. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 33, wherein the plurality of sampling ports are configured to, when the portable display unit is connected to the base unit, be accessible and minimise interference with the portable display unit.

35. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 29 to 34, further comprising a humidifier.

36. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 29 to 35, wherein the breathing assistance apparatus is capable of providing at least one of a high flow therapy or a pressure-based therapy to the patient.

37. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in any one of claims 29 to 36, wherein a recess is defined in the base unit to receive the plurality of sampling ports.

38. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 37, wherein the breathing assistance apparatus further comprises a covering configured to cover the recess, and wherein the covering is configured to allow the plurality of sampling ports to extend through the covering.

39. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 37 or 38, further comprising an electrical circuit within the recess or removably receivable within the recess, the electrical circuit being configured to operatively communicate with the at least one sampling ports.

40. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 39, wherein the electrical circuit comprises a sensor arrangement.

41. The breathing assistance apparatus as claimed in claim 40, wherein the sensor arrangement comprises at least one pressure sensor.

42. A portable sampling device comprising: at least one sampling port configured to connect with a sampling line associated with a patient; and an electrical circuit configured to operatively communicate with the at least one sampling port, wherein the portable sampling device is configured to electrically couple to a base unit of a breathing assistance apparatus.

43. The portable sampling device as claimed in claim 42, wherein the electrical circuit comprises a sensor arrangement.

44. The portable sampling device as claimed in claim 43, wherein the sensor arrangement comprises at least one pressure sensor.

45. The portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 42 to 44, further comprising a cover configured to cover an end region of the at least one sampling port that is configured to connect with the sampling line.

46. The portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 42 to 45, wherein the at least one sampling port comprises an optically transparent material.

47. The portable sampling device as claimed in claim 46, wherein the electrical circuit comprises a light source, and wherein the light source is configured to illuminate the at least one sampling port in response to determination of an operating mode of the breathing assistance apparatus requiring connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line.

48. The portable sampling device as claimed in claim 47, configured to turn off the light source in response to determination of connection of the at least one sampling port with the sampling line.

49. The portable sampling device as claimed in claim 47 or 48, configured to turn off the light source after a defined period of time.

50. The portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 47 to 49, wherein the light source in configured to illuminate the at least one sampling port in response to determination of a connection error with the sampling line.

51. The portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 42 to 50, wherein a quantity of the at least one sampling port arranged to connect with corresponding sampling lines for a therapy session for the patient is selectively configurable based on a breathing therapy mode to be provided by the breathing assistance apparatus corresponding to the therapy session.

52. The portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 42 to 51, wherein the sampling line comprises a gases sampling line, and wherein the at least one sampling port is configured to connect with the gases sampling line to convey a gases flow from the gases sampling line to the portable sampling device.

53. The portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 42 to 52, further comprising a USB connector configured to engage with a complementary USB connector at the base unit.

54. The portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 42 to 53, configured to be couplable to the base unit.

55. The portable sampling device as claimed in claim 54, further comprising: a device housing supporting the at least one sampling port and the electrical circuit; and a mounting feature couplable to the base unit, the mounting feature configured to mount the device housing to the base unit.

56. The portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 42 to 53, configured to be couplable to a breathing circuit associated with the patient.

57. The portable sampling device as claimed in claim 56, wherein the at least one sampling port comprises an adapter configured to removably couple to the breathing circuit.

58. The portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 42 to 57, further comprising a plurality of sampling ports configured to connect with corresponding sampling lines.

59. A breathing assistance apparatus comprising: a base unit; and the portable sampling device as claimed in any one of claims 42 to 58.